Rigol DS70304 Oscilloscope User Manual

Guaranty and Declaration

Trademark Information

RIGOL

is the trademark of RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Notices

• RIGOL products are covered by P.R.C. and foreign patents, issued and pending.

• RIGOL reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications and pricing

policies at the company's sole decision.

• Information in this publication replaces all previously released materials.

• Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.

• RIGOL shall not be liable for either incidental or consequential losses in connection with the

furnishing, use, or performance of this manual, as well as any information contained.

• Any part of this document is forbidden to be copied, photocopied, or rearranged without prior

written approval of RIGOL.

Product Certification

RIGOL guarantees that this product conforms to the national and industrial standards in China as

well as the ISO9001:2015 standard and the ISO14001:2015 standard. Other international standard

conformance certifications are in progress.

If you have any problem or requirement when using our products or this manual, please contact

RIGOL.

E-mail: ser[email protected]

Website:

http://www.rigol.com

Section Description Page

List of Figures...........................................................................................................................VIII

List of Tables.............................................................................................................................XIV

1 Safety Requirement............................................................................................. 1

1.1 General Safety Summary.......................................................................................................1

1.2 Safety Notices and Symbols.................................................................................................3

1.3 Measurement Category.........................................................................................................3

1.4 Ventilation Requirement........................................................................................................4

1.5 Working Environment.............................................................................................................4

1.6 Care and Cleaning....................................................................................................................6

1.7 Environmental Considerations............................................................................................ 6

1.8 Keep Hands Clear.....................................................................................................................7

2 Product Features ..................................................................................................8

3 Document Overview......................................................................................... 10

4 Quick Start............................................................................................................12

4.1 General Inspection................................................................................................................ 12

4.2 Appearance and Dimensions.............................................................................................12

4.3 To Prepare for Use.................................................................................................................13

4.3.1 To Connect to AC Power............................................................................................... 13

4.3.2 Turn-on Checkout............................................................................................................14

4.3.3 To Set the System Language....................................................................................... 15

4.3.4 To Connect the Probe.................................................................................................... 15

4.3.5 Function Inspection........................................................................................................17

4.3.6 Probe Compensation..................................................................................................... 19

4.4 Product Overview.................................................................................................................. 19

4.4.1 Front Panel Overview.....................................................................................................20

4.4.2 Rear Panel Overview.......................................................................................................22

4.4.3 User Interface....................................................................................................................25

4.4.4 Secondary 3.5-inch Touch Screen..............................................................................27

4.5 Touch Screen Gestures.........................................................................................................31

4.5.1 Tap........................................................................................................................................ 31

4.5.2 Pinch&Stretch...................................................................................................................32

DS70000 User Guide

4.5.3 Drag .................................................................................................................................... 32

4.6 Parameter Setting Method.................................................................................................33

4.7 To Use the Built-in Help System....................................................................................... 39

4.8 To View the Option Information and the Option Installation................................40

5 To Set the Vertical System...............................................................................42

5.1 To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel.....................................................................42

5.2 To Adjust the Vertical Scale................................................................................................43

5.3 To Adjust the Vertical Offset..............................................................................................45

5.4 Channel Coupling..................................................................................................................46

5.5 BW Limit....................................................................................................................................46

5.6 Input Impedance....................................................................................................................47

5.7 Waveform Invert.................................................................................................................... 48

5.8 Probe..........................................................................................................................................49

5.9 Amplitude Unit.......................................................................................................................52

5.10 Bias ............................................................................................................................................ 53

5.11 Channel Delay.........................................................................................................................53

5.12 Channel Label..........................................................................................................................54

6 To Set the Horizontal System.........................................................................55

6.1 To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base ...............................................................................56

6.2 To Adjust the Horizontal Position.................................................................................... 56

6.3 Delayed Sweep....................................................................................................................... 57

7 To Set the Sample System...............................................................................59

7.1 Acquisition Mode.................................................................................................................. 59

7.2 Sampling Mode......................................................................................................................61

7.3 Sample Rate.............................................................................................................................61

7.4 Memory Depth.......................................................................................................................62

7.5 Anti-Aliasing............................................................................................................................64

7.6 Horizontal Expansion........................................................................................................... 64

7.7 XY Mode................................................................................................................................... 65

8 To Trigger the Oscilloscope............................................................................ 68

8.1 Trigger Source.........................................................................................................................68

8.2 Trigger Level............................................................................................................................ 69

8.3 Trigger Mode...........................................................................................................................70

8.4 Trigger Coupling.................................................................................................................... 71

8.5 Trigger Holdoff....................................................................................................................... 72

DS70000 User Guide

8.6 Noise Rejection.......................................................................................................................73

8.7 Trigger Type.............................................................................................................................73

8.7.1 Edge Trigger...................................................................................................................... 73

8.7.2 Pulse Trigger......................................................................................................................75

8.7.3 Slope Trigger.....................................................................................................................79

8.7.4 Video Trigger.....................................................................................................................82

8.7.5 Pattern Trigger..................................................................................................................85

8.7.6 Duration Trigger...............................................................................................................88

8.7.7 Timeout Trigger................................................................................................................91

8.7.8 Runt Trigger.......................................................................................................................93

8.7.9 Window Trigger................................................................................................................96

8.7.10 Delay Trigger.....................................................................................................................99

8.7.11 Setup/Hold Trigger.......................................................................................................102

8.7.12 Nth Edge Trigger...........................................................................................................106

8.7.13 RS232 Trigger (Option)............................................................................................... 108

8.7.14 I2C Trigger (Option)..................................................................................................... 111

8.7.15 SPI Trigger (Option)......................................................................................................115

8.7.16 CAN Trigger (Option)...................................................................................................119

8.7.17 FlexRay Trigger (Option).............................................................................................123

8.7.18 LIN Trigger (Option).....................................................................................................126

8.7.19 I2S Trigger (Option)......................................................................................................129

8.7.20 MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option)............................................................................... 133

8.8 Trigger Output Connector................................................................................................138

9 Math Operation................................................................................................139

9.1 Arithmetic Operation.........................................................................................................141

9.2 Function Operation............................................................................................................ 144

9.3 FFT Operation.......................................................................................................................147

9.4 Logic Operation...................................................................................................................153

9.5 Digital Filter...........................................................................................................................156

10 Measure.............................................................................................................. 160

10.1 Measurement Parameter..................................................................................................160

10.1.1 Time Parameters............................................................................................................161

10.1.2 Count Values...................................................................................................................162

10.1.3 Delay and Phase Parameters.....................................................................................163

10.1.4 Voltage Parameters...................................................................................................... 165

DS70000 User Guide

III

10.1.5 Other Parameters..........................................................................................................166

10.2 To Select the Measurement Item...................................................................................167

10.3 Measurement Settings...................................................................................................... 170

10.4 Remove the Measurement Results................................................................................174

10.5 Auto Measurement.............................................................................................................174

10.6 Cursor Measurement......................................................................................................... 176

10.6.1 Manual Mode.................................................................................................................177

10.6.2 Track Mode......................................................................................................................180

10.6.3 XY Mode...........................................................................................................................183

11 Digital Voltmeter (DVM)and Frequency Counter................................. 185

11.1 Digital Voltmeter (DVM)................................................................................................... 185

11.1.1 Measurement Settings................................................................................................186

11.1.2 Remove the Measurement.........................................................................................187

11.2 Frequency Counter............................................................................................................. 187

11.2.1 Measurement Settings................................................................................................188

11.2.2 Reset Statistics................................................................................................................189

11.2.3 Remove the Measurement.........................................................................................189

12 Real-time Eye Analysis (Option)................................................................. 190

12.1 To Enable or Disable the Eye Analysis Function....................................................... 191

12.2 To Select the Source of the Eye Diagram....................................................................191

12.3 Threshold Settings..............................................................................................................191

12.4 To Set Clock Recovery........................................................................................................192

12.5 To Set the Data Rate...........................................................................................................193

12.6 Eye Measurement Result.................................................................................................. 193

12.7 To Set the Display-related Parameters.........................................................................195

13 Jitter Analysis (Option)...................................................................................196

13.1 To Enable or Disable the Jitter Function......................................................................197

13.2 To Set Parameters................................................................................................................197

13.3 To View the Jitter Measurement.................................................................................... 198

14 Reference Waveform...................................................................................... 200

14.1 To Enable Ref Function......................................................................................................200

14.2 To Set the Reference Waveform.....................................................................................201

14.3 To Set the Ref Waveform Display.................................................................................. 201

14.4 Export and Import Operation......................................................................................... 202

15 Pass/Fail Test......................................................................................................205

DS70000 User Guide

15.1 To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function..................................................... 205

15.2 To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation............................................................206

15.3 To Select the Source...........................................................................................................206

15.4 Mask.........................................................................................................................................206

15.5 To Set the Output Form of the Test Results............................................................... 207

15.6 To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics of the Test Results...............208

16 RTSA (Option)................................................................................................... 209

16.1 Basic Settings........................................................................................................................209

16.1.1 FREQ.................................................................................................................................. 210

16.1.2 SPAN..................................................................................................................................211

16.1.3 BW......................................................................................................................................211

16.1.4 AMPT.................................................................................................................................212

16.2 Peak Search........................................................................................................................... 213

17 Protocol Decoding.......................................................................................... 215

17.1 Parallel Decoding................................................................................................................ 215

17.1.1 Clock Setting (CLK).......................................................................................................217

17.1.2 Bus Setting...................................................................................................................... 217

17.1.3 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 218

17.1.4 Event Table .....................................................................................................................218

17.2 RS232 Decoding (Option)................................................................................................ 219

17.2.1 Source Setting................................................................................................................221

17.2.2 To Set Data Package.....................................................................................................222

17.2.3 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 223

17.2.4 Event Table...................................................................................................................... 223

17.3 I2C Decoding (Option)...................................................................................................... 224

17.3.1 Source Setting................................................................................................................225

17.3.2 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 226

17.3.3 Event Table...................................................................................................................... 226

17.4 SPI Decoding (Option).......................................................................................................228

17.4.1 To Set the Source.......................................................................................................... 229

17.4.2 To Set Mode and Data.................................................................................................229

17.4.3 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 230

17.4.4 Event Table...................................................................................................................... 231

17.5 LIN Decoding (Option)......................................................................................................232

17.5.1 Signal Configuration....................................................................................................232

DS70000 User Guide

17.5.2 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 233

17.5.3 Event Table...................................................................................................................... 233

17.6 CAN Decoding (Option)....................................................................................................235

17.6.1 Signal Configuration....................................................................................................235

17.6.2 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 237

17.6.3 Event Table...................................................................................................................... 237

17.7 FlexRay Decoding (Option)..............................................................................................239

17.7.1 Signal Configuration ...................................................................................................240

17.7.2 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 241

17.7.3 Event Table...................................................................................................................... 241

17.8 I2S Decoding (Option).......................................................................................................242

17.8.1 Source Setting................................................................................................................243

17.8.2 Bus Setting...................................................................................................................... 244

17.8.3 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 244

17.8.4 Event Table...................................................................................................................... 245

17.9 1553B Decoding (Option)................................................................................................ 246

17.9.1 To Set the Data Channel Source and the Threshold.........................................247

17.9.2 Display-related Setting............................................................................................... 247

17.9.3 Event Table...................................................................................................................... 247

18 Bus Analysis (Option)..................................................................................... 250

18.1 ETH Bus Analysis..................................................................................................................250

18.2 USB Bus Analysis................................................................................................................. 251

19 Multi-pane Windowing..................................................................................254

20 Waveform Recording and Playing............................................................. 256

20.1 Common Settings............................................................................................................... 256

20.2 Record Options....................................................................................................................257

20.3 Play Option............................................................................................................................258

21 Display Control.................................................................................................261

21.1 Display Type .........................................................................................................................261

21.2 Persistence Time..................................................................................................................262

21.3 Intensity..................................................................................................................................262

21.4 To Set the Screen Grid.......................................................................................................263

21.5 Display Setting..................................................................................................................... 263

21.6 Show Scale.............................................................................................................................263

21.7 Color Grade...........................................................................................................................263

DS70000 User Guide

21.8 Waveform Freeze.................................................................................................................263

22 Storage................................................................................................................ 265

22.1 To Enter the Storage Menu..............................................................................................265

22.2 To Save a File.........................................................................................................................265

22.2.1 Save Image......................................................................................................................265

22.2.2 Save Wave........................................................................................................................267

22.2.3 Save Setup.......................................................................................................................269

22.2.4 Binary Data Format (.bin)...........................................................................................271

22.3 Load a File..............................................................................................................................274

22.4 System Upgrade.................................................................................................................. 275

22.5 Disk Management...............................................................................................................276

22.6 Factory Settings................................................................................................................... 278

23 System Utility Function Setting.................................................................. 286

23.1 I/O Setting............................................................................................................................. 286

23.2 Object Missing..................................................................................................................... 288

23.3 About this Oscilloscope....................................................................................................289

23.4 Other Setting........................................................................................................................ 289

23.5 SelfCal......................................................................................................................................290

23.6 Option List............................................................................................................................. 290

23.7 Quick Settings...................................................................................................................... 291

23.8 Self-check...............................................................................................................................293

24 Remote Control................................................................................................297

24.1 Remote Control via USB .................................................................................................. 298

24.2 Remote Control via LAN...................................................................................................298

24.3 Remote Control via GPIB..................................................................................................299

25 Troubleshooting...............................................................................................301

26 Appendix............................................................................................................ 303

26.1 Appendix A: Options and Accessories.........................................................................303

26.2 Appendix B Warranty ........................................................................................................304

DS70000 User Guide

VII

List of Figures

Figure 4.1 Front View ..............................................................................................................

Figure 4.2 Side View ................................................................................................................13

Figure 4.3 To Connect to AC Power ...................................................................................14

Figure 4.4 To Connect the Passive Probe ........................................................................ 15

Figure 4.5 To Connect the Probe Head to the PA of the Active Probe ................. 16

Figure 4.6 To Connect the Active Probe .......................................................................... 17

Figure 4.7 To Use the Compensation Signal .................................................................. 18

Figure 4.8 Waveform Signal .................................................................................................18

Figure 4.9 Probe Compensation .........................................................................................19

Figure 4.10 Front Panel ..........................................................................................................20

Figure 4.11 Rear Panel ............................................................................................................22

Figure 4.12 User Interface .....................................................................................................25

Figure 4.13 Smart Quick-Responsive Keyboard Interface ......................................... 28

Figure 4.14 Flip Screen Adjustment Interface ................................................................30

Figure 4.15 Tap Gesture .........................................................................................................32

Figure 4.16 Pinch&Stretch Gesture ....................................................................................32

Figure 4.17 Drag Gesture ......................................................................................................33

Figure 4.18 English Input Interface ....................................................................................34

Figure 4.19 Chinese Input Interface .................................................................................. 35

Figure 4.20 String Keypad .....................................................................................................37

Figure 4.21 Numeric Keypad ................................................................................................38

Figure 4.22 Help Information .............................................................................................. 39

Figure 5.1 Vertical Menu for Channel ...............................................................................42

Figure 5.2 Input Impedance Modification .......................................................................48

Figure 5.3 Waveform Invert ..................................................................................................49

Figure 5.4 Probe Setting Menu ...........................................................................................49

Figure 5.5 RP7000/PVA7000/PVA8000 Series Probe Setting Menu .......................50

DS70000 User Guide

VIII

Figure 5.6 SelfCal ..................................................................................................................... 52

Figure 5.7 Zero Offset ............................................................................................................ 54

Figure 6.1 Horizontal System Menu ..................................................................................55

Figure 6.2 Delayed Sweep Mode ........................................................................................58

Figure 7.1 Horizontal System Menu ..................................................................................59

Figure 7.2 Memory Depth .................................................................................................... 63

Figure 7.3 XY Setting Menu ................................................................................................. 65

Figure 7.4 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation ......................... 66

Figure 8.1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory ......................................70

Figure 8.2 Trigger Holdoff .....................................................................................................72

Figure 8.3 Edge Trigger Setting Menu ..............................................................................74

Figure 8.4 Positive Pulse Width/Negative Pulse Width ..............................................76

Figure 8.5 Pulse Trigger Setting Menu .............................................................................77

Figure 8.6 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time ................................................. 79

Figure 8.7 Slope Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................ 80

Figure 8.8 Video Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................83

Figure 8.9 Pattern Trigger ..................................................................................................... 86

Figure 8.10 Pattern Trigger Setting Menu .......................................................................86

Figure 8.11 Duration Trigger ................................................................................................88

Figure 8.12 Duration Trigger Setting Menu ....................................................................89

Figure 8.13 Timeout Trigger .................................................................................................91

Figure 8.14 Timeout Trigger Menu ....................................................................................92

Figure 8.15 Runt Trigger ........................................................................................................94

Figure 8.16 Runt Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................94

Figure 8.17 Window Trigger Setting Menu .....................................................................97

Figure 8.18 Delay Trigger ......................................................................................................99

Figure 8.19 Delay Trigger Setting Menu ....................................................................... 100

Figure 8.20 Setup/Hold Trigger ........................................................................................103

Figure 8.21 Setup/Hold Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................104

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.22 Nth Edge Trigger ............................................................................................ 106

Figure 8.23 Nth Edge Trigger Setting Menu ................................................................107

Figure 8.24 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Protocol ...................................................109

Figure 8.25 RS232 Trigger Setting Menu ...................................................................... 109

Figure 8.26 Schematic Diagram of I2C Protocol .........................................................111

Figure 8.27 I2C Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................ 112

Figure 8.28 Bin Format Setting .........................................................................................114

Figure 8.29 Hex Format Setting ....................................................................................... 114

Figure 8.30 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus ........................................................................116

Figure 8.31 SPI Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................ 116

Figure 8.32 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus ........................................................ 119

Figure 8.33 CAN Trigger Setting Menu ..........................................................................120

Figure 8.34 Sample Position ..............................................................................................121

Figure 8.35 Frame Format of FlexRay Bus .................................................................... 123

Figure 8.36 FlexRay Trigger Setting Menu ....................................................................124

Figure 8.37 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus .......................................................... 126

Figure 8.38 LIN Trigger Setting Menu ............................................................................127

Figure 8.39 Sample Position ..............................................................................................128

Figure 8.40 Sequential Chart of I2S Bus ........................................................................130

Figure 8.41 I2S Trigger Setting Menu .............................................................................130

Figure 8.42 Formats of the Command Word, Data Word, and Status Word of

the 1553B Bus ....................................................................................................................134

Figure 8.43 MIL-STD-1553 Trigger Setting Menu ......................................................135

Figure 9.1 Math Operation Menu ....................................................................................140

Figure 9.2 Waveform Display Window of the Operation Results .........................141

Figure 9.3 Arithmetic Operation Menu ..........................................................................142

Figure 9.4 Operation Result Display Window ..............................................................143

Figure 9.5 Function Operation Menu .............................................................................145

Figure 9.6 Operation Result Display Window ..............................................................146

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 9.7 FFT Operation Menu ....................................................................................... 148

Figure 9.8 FFT Operation Window .................................................................................. 149

Figure 9.9 Peak Search .........................................................................................................152

Figure 9.10 Logic Operation Menu .................................................................................153

Figure 9.11 Operation Result Display Window ........................................................... 155

Figure 9.12 Digital Filter Menu .........................................................................................157

Figure 9.13 Operation Result Display Window ........................................................... 158

Figure 10.1 Time Parameters .............................................................................................161

Figure 10.2 Delay and Phase Parameters ......................................................................163

Figure 10.3 Voltage Parameters ....................................................................................... 165

Figure 10.4 Vertical Measurement Items ...................................................................... 168

Figure 10.5 Horizontal Measurement Items ................................................................ 169

Figure 10.6 Other Measurement Items ..........................................................................170

Figure 10.7 Measurement Settings ................................................................................. 171

Figure 10.8 Cursor .................................................................................................................176

Figure 10.9 Cursor Measurement Result .......................................................................177

Figure 10.10 Manual Mode Setting Menu ....................................................................178

Figure 10.11 Manual Cursor Measurement Example ................................................180

Figure 10.12 Track Mode Setting Menu ........................................................................ 181

Figure 10.13 Track Measurement (before Horizontal Expansion) ........................ 182

Figure 10.14 Track Measurement (after Horizontal Expansion) ............................183

Figure 10.15 XY Mode ......................................................................................................... 183

Figure 11.1 DVM Setting Menu ........................................................................................186

Figure 11.2 Frequency Counter Setting Menu ............................................................188

Figure 12.1 Eye Diagram Setting Menu .........................................................................190

Figure 12.2 Eye Measurement Result .............................................................................191

Figure 12.3 Diagram of Eye Measurement Parameters ............................................194

Figure 13.1 Jitter Setting Menu ........................................................................................196

Figure 14.1 Reference Waveform Menu ........................................................................200

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 14.2 Disk Management Interface .......................................................................203

Figure 15.1 Pass/Fail Test Menu ....................................................................................... 205

Figure 16.1 Basic Setting Menu ........................................................................................209

Figure 16.2 Peak Search Menu ......................................................................................... 213

Figure 17.1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding .............................................. 216

Figure 17.2 Parallel Decoding Menu .............................................................................. 216

Figure 17.3 Parallel Decoding Event Table ....................................................................219

Figure 17.4 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus ................................................ 220

Figure 17.5 Schematic Diagram of Negative Logic ................................................... 220

Figure 17.6 RS232 Decoding Menu ................................................................................ 221

Figure 17.7 RS232 Decoding Event Table ..................................................................... 224

Figure 17.8 I2C Serial Bus ...................................................................................................224

Figure 17.9 I2C Decoding Menu ...................................................................................... 225

Figure 17.10 I2C Decoding Event Table .........................................................................227

Figure 17.11 SPI Serial Bus .................................................................................................228

Figure 17.12 SPI Decoding Menu ....................................................................................228

Figure 17.13 SPI Decoding Event Table ......................................................................... 231

Figure 17.14 LIN Decoding Menu ....................................................................................232

Figure 17.15 LIN Decoding Event Table .........................................................................234

Figure 17.16 CAN Decoding Menu ................................................................................. 235

Figure 17.17 Sample Position ............................................................................................236

Figure 17.18 CAN Decoding Event Table ...................................................................... 238

Figure 17.19 FlexRay Decoding Menu ........................................................................... 239

Figure 17.20 Sample Position ............................................................................................240

Figure 17.21 FlexRay Decoding Event Table ................................................................ 241

Figure 17.22 I2S Decoding Menu .................................................................................... 243

Figure 17.23 I2S Decoding Event Table ......................................................................... 245

Figure 17.24 1553B Decoding Menu ..............................................................................246

Figure 17.25 1553B Decoding Event Table ...................................................................248

DS70000 User Guide

XII

Figure 18.1 ETH Bus Analysis Configuration Menu ...................................................250

Figure 18.2 USB Bus Analysis Configuration Menu ...................................................252

Figure 19.1 "Add Window" Interface ..............................................................................254

Figure 20.1 Waveform Recording Interface ................................................................. 256

Figure 20.2 Play Operation Interface ..............................................................................259

Figure 21.1 Display Setting Menu ................................................................................... 261

Figure 21.2 Vector Display ..................................................................................................262

Figure 22.1 Image Saving Setting Menu .......................................................................266

Figure 22.2 Waveform Saving Setting Menu ...............................................................268

Figure 22.3 Setup Saving Setting Menu ........................................................................270

Figure 22.4 Load Setting Menu ........................................................................................275

Figure 22.5 Upgrade Menu ................................................................................................276

Figure 22.6 Disk Management Interface .......................................................................277

Figure 23.1 Self-calibration Menu ................................................................................... 290

Figure 23.2 Quick Settings Menu .................................................................................... 291

Figure 23.3 Key Test Interface ...........................................................................................293

Figure 23.4 Touch Screen Test Interface ........................................................................294

Figure 23.5 Touch-Enabled Gesture Operation Interface ........................................295

Figure 23.6 Board Test Interface .......................................................................................296

Figure 24.1 Search for the Available Device .................................................................300

Figure 24.2 Confirm the Available Device .....................................................................300

DS70000 User Guide

XIII

List of Tables

Table 5.1 BW Limit ...................................................................................................................

Table 5.2 Probe Ratio ..............................................................................................................50

Table 8.1 Video Standard ...................................................................................................... 84

Table 9.1 Window Function ................................................................................................150

Table 9.2 Logic Operation .................................................................................................. 154

Table 17.1 Bus Setting ..........................................................................................................217

Table 22.1 File Header ..........................................................................................................271

Table 22.2 Waveform Header ............................................................................................272

Table 22.3 Waveform Data Header ................................................................................. 273

Table 22.4 Factory Settings ................................................................................................278

DS70000 User Guide

XIV

1 Safety Requirement

1.1 General Safety Summary

Please review the following safety precautions carefully before putting the instrument

into operation so as to avoid any personal injury or damage to the instrument and

any product connected to it. To prevent potential hazards, please follow the

instructions specified in this manual to use the instrument properly.

• Use Proper Power Cord.

Only the exclusive power cord designed for the instrument and authorized for

use within the local country could be used.

• Ground the Instrument.

The instrument is grounded through the Protective Earth lead of the power cord.

To avoid electric shock, it is essential to connect the earth terminal of the power

cord to the Protective Earth terminal before connecting any inputs or outputs.

• Connect the Probe Correctly.

If a probe is used, the probe ground lead must be connected to earth ground.

Do not connect the ground lead to high voltage. Improper way of connection

could result in dangerous voltages being present on the connectors, controls or

other surfaces of the oscilloscope and probes, which will cause potential hazards

for operators.

• Observe All Terminal Ratings.

To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markers on the instrument

and check your manual for more information about ratings before connecting

the instrument.

• Use Proper Overvoltage Protection.

Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach

the product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an

electric shock.

• Do Not Operate Without Covers.

Do not operate the instrument with covers or panels removed.

• Do Not Insert Objects Into the Air Outlet.

Do not insert objects into the air outlet, as doing so may cause damage to the

instrument.

• Use Proper Fuse.

Please use the specified fuses.

Safety Requirement

DS70000 User Guide

• Avoid Circuit or Wire Exposure.

Do not touch exposed junctions and components when the unit is powered.

• Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures.

If you suspect damage occurs to the instrument, have it inspected by RIGOL

authorized personnel before further operations. Any maintenance, adjustment or

replacement especially to circuits or accessories must be performed by RIGOL

authorized personnel.

• Keep Well Ventilation.

Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of instrument temperature which

would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument well

ventilated and inspect the intake and fan regularly.

• Do Not Operate in Wet Conditions.

In order to avoid short circuiting to the interior of the device or electric shock,

please do not operate the instrument in a humid environment.

• Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.

In order to avoid damage to the device or personal injuries, it is important to

operate the device away from an explosive atmosphere.

• Keep Instrument Surfaces Clean and Dry.

To avoid dust or moisture from affecting the performance of the instrument,

keep the surfaces of the instrument clean and dry.

• Prevent Electrostatic Impact.

Operate the instrument in an electrostatic discharge protective environment to

avoid damage induced by static discharges. Always ground both the internal and

external conductors of cables to release static before making connections.

• Use the Battery Properly.

Do not expose the battery (if available) to high temperature or fire. Keep it out of

the reach of children. Improper change of a battery (lithium battery) may cause

an explosion. Use the RIGOL specified battery only.

• Handle with Caution.

Please handle with care during transportation to avoid damage to keys, knobs,

interfaces, and other parts on the panels.

Warning

Equipment meeting Class A requirements may not offer adequate protection to broadcast

services within residential environment.

Safety Requirement

DS70000 User Guide

1.2 Safety Notices and Symbols

Safety Notices in this Manual:

Warning

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not avoided, will result in

serious injury or death.

Caution

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not avoided, could result

in damage to the product or loss of important data.

Safety Terms on the Product:

• DANGER

It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in injury

or hazard immediately.

• WARNING

It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in

potential injury or hazard.

• CAUTION

It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in

damage to the product or other devices connected to the product.

Safety Symbols on the Product:

Hazardous

Voltage

Safety Warning Protective Earth

Terminal

Chassis Ground Test Ground

1.3 Measurement Category

Measurement Category

This instrument can make measurements in Measurement Category I.

Warning

This instrument can only be used for measurements within its specified measurement

categories.

Safety Requirement

DS70000 User Guide

Measurement Category Definitions

• Measurement category I is for measurements performed on circuits not directly

connected to MAINS. Examples are measurements on circuits not derived from

MAINS, and specially protected (internal) MAINS derived circuits. In the latter

case, transient stresses are variable. Thus, you must know the transient withstand

capability of the equipment.

• Measurement category II is for measurements performed on circuits directly

connected to low voltage installation. Examples are measurements on household

appliances, portable tools and similar equipment.

• Measurement category III is for measurements performed in the building

installation. Examples are measurements on distribution boards, circuit-breakers,

wiring (including cables, bus-bars, junction boxes, switches and socket-outlets) in

the fixed installation, and equipment for industrial use and some other

equipment. For example, stationary motors with permanent connection to a

fixed installation.

• Measurement category IV is for measurements performed at the source of a

low-voltage installation. Examples are electricity meters and measurements on

primary overcurrent protection devices and ripple control units.

1.4 Ventilation Requirement

This instrument uses a fan to force cooling. Please make sure that the air inlet and

outlet areas are free from obstructions and have free air. When using the instrument

in a bench-top or rack setting, provide at least 10 cm clearance beside, above and

behind the instrument for adequate ventilation.

Caution

Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the instrument, which

would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument well ventilated and

inspect the air outlet and the fan regularly.

1.5 Working Environment

Temperature

Operating: 0℃ to +50℃

Non-operating: -30℃ to +70℃

Humidity

• Operating:

Below +30℃: ≤90%RH (without condensation)

+30℃ to +40℃: ≤75% RH (without condensation)

Safety Requirement

DS70000 User Guide

+40℃ to +50℃: ≤45%RH (without condensation)

• Non-operating:

Below +65℃: ≤90%RH (without condensation)

Warning

To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never operate the

instrument in a humid environment.

Altitude

• Operating: below 3 km

• Non-operating: below 15 km

Protection Level Against Electric Shock

ESD ±8kV

Installation (Overvoltage) Category

This product is powered by mains conforming to installation (overvoltage) category II.

Warning

Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach the

product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an electric shock.

Installation (Overvoltage) Category Definitions

Installation (overvoltage) category I refers to signal level which is applicable to

equipment measurement terminals connected to the source circuit. Among these

terminals, precautions are done to limit the transient voltage to a low level.

Installation (overvoltage) category II refers to the local power distribution level which

is applicable to equipment connected to the AC line (AC power).

Pollution Degree

Pollution Degree 2

Pollution Degree Definition

• Pollution Degree 1: No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs.

The pollution has no effect. For example, a clean room or air-conditioned office

environment.

• Pollution Degree 2: Normally only nonconductive pollution occurs. Temporary

conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected. For example, indoor

environment.

• Pollution Degree 3: Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that

becomes conductive due to condensation occurs. To be found in industrial

Safety Requirement

DS70000 User Guide

environment or construction sites (harsh environments). For example, sheltered

outdoor environment.

• Pollution Degree 4: The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused by

conductive dust, rain, or snow. For example, outdoor areas.

Safety Class

Class 1 – Grounded Product

1.6 Care and Cleaning

Care

Do not store or leave the instrument where it may be exposed to direct sunlight for

long periods of time.

Cleaning

Clean the instrument regularly according to its operating conditions.

1 Disconnect the instrument from all power sources.

2 Clean the external surfaces of the instrument with a soft cloth dampened with mild

detergent or water. Avoid having any water or other objects into the chassis via the

heat dissipation hole. When cleaning the LCD, take care to avoid scarifying it.

Caution

To avoid damage to the instrument, do not expose it to caustic liquids.

Warning

To avoid short-circuit resulting from moisture or personal injuries, ensure that the

instrument is completely dry before connecting it to the power supply.

1.7 Environmental Considerations

The following symbol indicates that this product complies with the WEEE Directive

2002/96/EC.

The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or

human health. To avoid the release of such substances into the environment and

avoid harm to human health, we recommend you to recycle this product

appropriately to ensure that most materials are reused or recycled properly. Please

contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information.

Safety Requirement

DS70000 User Guide

You can click on the following link

https://www.rigol.com/services/declaration.html

download the latest version of the RoHS&WEEE certification file.

1.8 Keep Hands Clear

Warning

While the small screen is opening or closing, keep hands clear from the inclination angle

between the large screen and its instrument body to avoid being pinched.

Safety Requirement

DS70000 User Guide

2 Product Features

Product Features

• Analog channel bandwidth: Max. 5 GHz bandwidth, 4 analog channels and 1

EXT channel

• Up to 20 GSa/s sample rate

• Max. 2 Gpts memory depth

• Waveform capture rate 1,000,000 wfms/s

• Vertical sensitivity range: 1 mV/div~10 V/div (1 MΩ), 1 mV/div~1 V/div (50 Ω)

• Timebase range: 50 ps/div~1000 s/div

• Up to 2,000,000 frames of hardware real-time and ceaseless waveforms

recording and playback functions

• Integrates 5 independent instruments into 1, including digital oscilloscope,

real-time spectrum analyzer (option), digital voltmeter, 8-digit frequency

counter and totalizer, and protocol analyzer (option)

• Standard trigger functions: Edge trigger, Pulse trigger, Slope trigger, Video

trigger, Pattern trigger, Duration trigger, Timeout trigger, Runt trigger, Window

trigger, Delay trigger, Setup/Hold trigger, Nth Edge trigger, RS232, I2C, SPI,

CAN, FlexRay, LIN, I2S, and MIL-STD-1553

• A variety of serial decoding functions (option): RS232, I2C, SPI, CAN, FlexRay,

LIN, I2S, MIL-STD-1553, and CAN-FD; supporting 4 decoding channels

• Auto measurement of 41 waveform parameters; full-memory hardware

measurement function

• A variety of math operations: A+B, A-B, A×B, A/B, FFT, A&&B, A||B, A^B, !A,

Intg, Diff, Lg, Ln, Exp, Sqrt, Abs, AX+B, LowPass, HighPass, BandPass, BandStop,

built-in enhanced FFT analysis and peak search function

• Eye diagram and jitter analysis (option)

• Unique UltraVision III technical platform

• Multiple interfaces available: USB HOST&DEVICE, LAN(LXI), HDMI, AUX OUT;

Web Control supported

• Main 15.6'' HD capacitive multi-touch screen equipped with electronically

controlled one-button screen inclination for signal visualization, analysis, and

results; multi-window split screen display

• The photoelectric encoder operating knob prolongs its service life,

guaranteeing more than 100,000 times of pressing operation and 1 million

times of rotation operation, greatly improving its service life

• Secondary 3.5-inch touch screen separates menus and functions from signals

and analysis with a customized function and shortcut menu

Product Features

DS70000 User Guide

Product Features

• Electronic label display of the model and main parameters of the product,

sustaining the display contents up to 20 years, and capable to be updated

when any option is upgraded

• Support online version upgrade

• 7 GHz high-end active differential probe PVA8700 (option)

DS70000 series digital oscilloscope adopts RIGOL's chipset "Phoenix", delivering

excellent performance with a maximum sample rate of 20 GSa/s, 5 GHz bandwidth.

RIGOL's brand new UltraVison III technical platform guarantees the specifications to

reach the advanced level in the industry, with the capture rate up to millions of

waveforms per second, 2 Gpts memory depth, 8-16 bits adjustable resolution, and

10,000 FFTs/s. In addition to the improved hardware specifications, the DS70000

series digital oscilloscope has a main 15.6-inch HD capacitive multi-touch screen

equipped with electronically controlled one-button screen inclination for signal

visualization, analysis, and results; a secondary 3.5-inch small screen with a

customized function and shortcut menu display; and other user-friendly designs,

bringing users an extraordinary human-machine interface experience.

Product Features

DS70000 User Guide

3 Document Overview

This manual gives you a quick review about the front and rear panel of DS70000

series, the user interface, and the basic operation method.

Tip

For the latest version of this manual, download it from the official website of RIGOL (

http://

www.rigol.com

Publication Number

UGA28100-1110

Software Version

Software upgrade might change or add product features. Please acquire the latest

version of the manual from RIGOL website or contact RIGOL to upgrade the software.

Format Conventions in this Manual

1 Key

The front panel key is denoted by the menu key icon. For example,

indicates the “Default” key.

2 Menu

The menu item is denoted by the format of "Menu Name (Bold) + Character

Shading" in the manual. For example,

Setup indicates clicking or tapping the

"Setup" sub-menu under the "Utility" function menu to view the basic setting

configuration items.

3 Operation Procedures

The next step of the operation is denoted by ">" in the manual. For example,

> Storage indicates that first clicking or tapping the icon , then clicking or

tapping Storage.

4 Knob

Label Knob Label Knob

Channel

Channel On/Off

Button

Multifunction

Multi-function

Button

Multifunction

Multi-function

Knob

Multifunction

Multi-function

Knob

Document Overview

DS70000 User Guide

Label Knob Label Knob

SCALE

Channel Vertical

Scale Knob

OFFSET

Channel Vertical

Position Knob

Content Conventions in this Manual

DS70000 series includes the following models. Unless otherwise specified, this

manual takes DS70504 as an example to illustrate the functions and operation

methods of DS70000 series power supply.

Model Max. Analog Bandwidth Analog Channel

DS70504 5 GHz 4

DS70304 3 GHz 4

Document Overview

DS70000 User Guide

4 Quick Start

4.1 General Inspection

1 Inspect the packaging

If the packaging has been damaged, do not dispose the damaged packaging or

cushioning materials until the shipment has been checked for completeness and

has passed both electrical and mechanical tests.

The consigner or carrier shall be liable for the damage to the instrument resulting

from shipment. RIGOL would not be responsible for free maintenance/rework or

replacement of the instrument.

2 Inspect the instrument

In case of any mechanical damage,missing parts, or failure in passing the electrical

and mechanical tests, contact your RIGOL sales representative.

3 Check the accessories

Please check the accessories according to the packing lists. If the accessories are

damaged or incomplete, please contact your RIGOL sales representative.

4.2 Appearance and Dimensions

Figure 4.1 Front View

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.2 Side View

4.3 To Prepare for Use

4.3.1 To Connect to AC Power

The power requirements of the oscilloscope are 100-240 V, 45-440 Hz. Please use the

power cord provided in the accessories to connect the oscilloscope to the AC power

source, as shown in

Figure 4.3

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.3 To Connect to AC Power

Warning

To avoid electric shock, ensure that the instrument is correctly grounded.

4.3.2 Turn-on Checkout

After the instrument is connected to the power source, press the power key at the

lower-left corner of the front panel to power on the instrument. During the start-up

process, the instrument performs a series of self-tests. After the self-test, the splash

screen is displayed.

• Restart: Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of

the screen to open the function navigation. Click or tap the Restart icon, then a

prompt message “Are you sure to reboot?” is displayed. Click or tap OK to

restart the instrument.

• Shutdown: Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner

of the screen to open the function navigation. Click or tap the Shutdown icon,

then a prompt message “Are you sure to shutdown?” is displayed. Click or tap

OK to shut down the instrument.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

4.3.3 To Set the System Language

This oscilloscope supports multiple languages. You can click or tap > Utility >

Setup > Language to set the system language.

4.3.4 To Connect the Probe

RIGOL provides passive and active probes for DS70000 series. For specific probe

models, please refer to

DS70000 Datasheet

. For detailed technical information of the

probes, please refer to the corresponding Probe User Guide.

To Connect the Passive Probe

1 Connect the BNC terminal of the probe to an analog channel input terminal of the

oscilloscope on the front panel as shown in

Figure 4.4

2 Connect the ground alligator clip or spring of the probe to the circuit ground

terminal, and then connect the probe tip to the circuit point to be tested.

Figure 4.4 To Connect the Passive Probe

After you connect the passive probe, check the probe function and probe

compensation adjustment before making measurements. For detailed procedures,

refer to

Function Inspection

and

Probe Compensation

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

To Connect the Active Probe

Take PVA8000 (active differential probe) as an example.

1 Connect the probe head to the preamp of the active probe, as shown in the figure

below.

Figure 4.5 To Connect the Probe Head to the PA of the Active Probe

2 Connect the other end of the preamp to an analog channel input terminal of the

oscilloscope on the front panel, as shown in the figure below. Note that you need

to push the probe to the due position to lock it firmly.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.6 To Connect the Active Probe

3 Use the probe's auxiliary device to connect the probe head to the circuit under

test. For detailed information of the probes, please refer to

User Guide for

PVA8000 Series Active Probe

After connecting the active probe, you can perform probe calibration and offset

voltage adjustment if necessary. For detailed procedures, refer to the "Active Probe"

section in User Guide.

4.3.5 Function Inspection

1 Press on the front panel, then a prompt message displaying “Restore

default settings?” appears on the screen. Click OK to restore the instrument to its

factory default settings.

2 Connect the ground alligator clip of the probe to the "Ground Terminal" as shown

Figure 4.7

below.

3 Use the probe to connect the input terminal of CH1 of the oscilloscope and the

"Compensation Signal Output Terminal" of the probe, as shown in

Figure 4.7

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.7 To Use the Compensation Signal

4 Set the probe ratio based on the attenuation of the probe, and then click

Auto.

5 Observe the waveform on the display. In normal condition, the square waveform as

shown in the figure below should be displayed.

Figure 4.8 Waveform Signal

6 Use the same method to test the other channels. If the square waveforms actually

shown do not match that in the figure above, please perform "Probe

Compensation" introduced in the next section.

Warning

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

To avoid electric shock when using the probe, please make sure that the insulated wire of

the probe is in good condition. Do not touch the metallic part of the probe when the

probe is connected to high voltage source.

4.3.6 Probe Compensation

When the probes are used for the first time, you should compensate the probes to

make them match the input channels of the oscilloscope. Non-compensated or

poorly compensated probes may cause measurement inaccuracy or errors. The probe

compensation procedures are as follows:

1 Perform Step 1, 2, 3 and 4 in

Function Inspection

2 Check the displayed waveforms and compare them with the waveforms shown in

Figure 4.9

Figure 4.9 Probe Compensation

3 Use the probe compensation adjustment tool provided in the accessories to adjust

the low-frequency compensation adjustment hole on the probe until the displayed

waveform is consistent with the "Perfectly compensated" waveform shown in the

above figure.

4.4 Product Overview

This chapter introduces the front/rear panel of the oscilloscope and its user interface.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

4.4.1 Front Panel Overview

Figure 4.10 Front Panel

1 Electronic Label

The product model and its main parameters displayed on the electronic label,

sustaining its contents up to 20 years even at power-off state. The parameters will

be updated automatically after upgrade to keep the information displayed on the

electronic label consistent with that of the current instrument.

2 Screen Tilt Adjustment Key

Controls whether to adjust the tilt of the large and high-definition 15.6-inch touch

screen.

3 Run/Stop Key

Controls the operating status of the channel output signal.

4 Default

Press this key to restore the instrument to its default settings.

5 Working Mode Switchover Key

Press this key to switch between DSO and AWG modes.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

6 Quick Operation Key

Related to quick operation setting. It is used to customize the quick operation key

for a specified function. By default, it's a shortcut key for screen capture.

7 Key

Temporally unavailable to use.

8 Multifunction Knob

Its function corresponds with the function key currently selected on the secondary

high-definition smart and quick-responsive touch screen.

9 Multifunction Key

Its function corresponds with the function key currently selected on the secondary

high-definition smart and quick-responsive touch screen.

10 Multifunction Knob

Its function corresponds with the function key currently selected on the secondary

high-definition smart and quick-responsive touch screen.

11 High-Definition Smart and Quick-responsive Shortcut Menu Display

Operates the instrument with the functions icons available on the small screen.

When you press the tilt adjustment key, you can adjust the tilt of the main display

on this screen.

12 Channel Vertical Offset Knob

Adjusts the vertical offset of the channel.

13 Channel On/Off Button

Pressing this button continuously can enable or disable the specified analog input

channel.

14 Channel Vertical Scale Knob

Adjusts the vertical scale of the channel.

15 Probe Compensation Signal Output Terminal

16 Probe Compensation Signal Ground Terminal

17 Analog Channel Input Terminals

Can be connected to the probe and inputs the analog signal.

18 Power Key

Powers on or off the instrument.

19 USB HOST Interface

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Supports FAT32 format Flash type USB storage device, RIGOL TMC digital

oscilloscope, and the USB-GPIB interface converter.

- USB storage device: reads the waveform or sequence files saved in the USB

storage device; stores the edited waveform and sequence data into the USB

storage device; saves the contents displayed on the screen to the USB storage

device in the format of a captured image.

- TMC DS: seamlessly interconnects with the RIGOL DS that meets the TMC

standard; reads and stores the waveform data collected by the DS and then

rebuilds waveforms without distortion.

- USB-GPIB interface converter (standard accessory): extends the GPIB

interface for RIGOL instruments that integrates the USB HOST interface but not

the GPIB interface.

20 Main Display with One-Button Electronic Tilt

15.6-inch high-definition large touch screen, available to be adjusted its tilt

electronically. Displays the menu label and parameter settings of the current

function, system state, prompt messages, and other information.

4.4.2 Rear Panel Overview

Figure 4.11 Rear Panel

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

1 Pulse Source Input

(temporally unavailable)

2 Pulse Source Output

(temporally unavailable)

3 Pulse Source Reverse Output

(temporally unavailable)

4 Pulse Source Reverse Input

(temporally unavailable)

5 AUX OUT

- Trig Out:

The oscilloscope can output a signal that can reflect the current capture rate of

the oscilloscope at each trigger via this SMA connector interface. Connect the

signal to a waveform display device and measure the frequency of the signal.

The measurement result is the same as the current capture rate.

- Pass/Fail:

In the pass/fail test, the instrument will output a pulse via the SMA connector

when a passed or failed waveform is detected during the pass/fail test.

6 EXT 1MΩ/18pF

Inputs the external trigger signal.

7 SFP+ Interface

SFP+ (Small Form Factor Pluggable), an optical transceiver electrical interface,

supports hot-plugging. The interface supports 10 Gbit/s data transmission.

8 10 MHz OUT

A SMA connector that can output the 10 MHz clock signal generated by the

internal crystal oscillator inside the instrument.

9 10 MHz IN

A SMA connector that can input the external reference clock signal.

10 USB DEVICE

Connects the instrument to the PC via this interface. Then you can use the PC

software Ultra Scope to send the SCPI commands or use the user-defined

programming to control the instrument.

11 USB HOST Interface

Connects the compatible storage device to the instrument, supporting FAT32

format Flash type USB storage device, RIGOL TMC digital oscilloscope, and the

USB-GPIB interface converter.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

- USB storage device: reads the waveform files or state files saved in the USB

storage device; or stores the current instrument states or edited waveform data

into the USB storage device; saves the contents displayed on the screen to the

USB storage device in the format of a captured image.

- TMC DS: seamlessly interconnects with the RIGOL DS that meets the TMC

standard; reads and stores the waveform data collected by the DS and then

rebuilds waveforms without distortion.

- USB-GPIB interface converter (optional accessory): extends the GPIB

interface for RIGOL instruments that integrates the USB HOST interface but not

the GPIB interface.

12 LAN

Connects the instrument to network via this interface. The instrument is in

compliance with the standards specified in LXI Device Specification 2011. It can be

used to set up a test system with other standard devices. Then you can use the

Web Control or PC software Ultra Scope to send the SCPI commands or use the

user-defined programming to control the instrument. When update is available,

you can perform online upgrading for the system software of the instrument via

the LAN interface. When it is connected to network, once a network printer is

connected, you can print the waveform displayed on the screen with the printer.

13 HDMI

You can connect the instrument to an external display that has the HDMI interface

(e.g. monitor or projector) via this interface to better observe the waveform display

clearly. At this time, you can also view the waveforms on the LCD of the

instrument.

14 AC Power Cord Connector

The rated AC power source supported by the instrument is (90 V-264 V, 47 Hz~ 63

Hz), and its maximum input power shall not exceed 650 W. Please use the power

cord provided in the accessories to connect the instrument to the AC power

source.

15 Fuse

If you need to replace the fuse, use only the specified fuse.

16 Power Switch

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

4.4.3 User Interface

Figure 4.12 User Interface

1 Function Navigation Icon

Tap this icon to open the function navigation menu.

2 Channel Label

- Displays the on/off status of CH1~CH4 respectively.

- Displays the coupling mode of the channel.

- Displays the vertical scale of the channel.

- Displays the offset of the channel.

3 Function Navigation Menu

In this menu, tap the specified function icon to enter the desired function menu to

make configurations.

4 Channel Operation Label

Displays the on/off status of the operation channel Math1~Math4, its operation

type, and vertical scale.

5 RTSA Label

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Displays the status of RTSA mode.

6 Multi-window Display Area

If you enable multi-window display, then multiple windows can be displayed on

the screen at one time.

7 Notification Area

Displays the sound icon, USB icon, time, and LAN icon.

- USB storage device icon: When a USB storage device is detected,

will be

displayed.

- LAN connection icon: When the LAN interface is successfully connected,

displayed.

- Sound icon: In the “Utility” menu, click or tap Setup > Beeper to enable or

disable the sound. When on,

will be displayed; when off, will be

displayed.

- Web Control icon: When you control the instrument through Web Control

remote operation,

appears.

- Time: displays the system time. For the setting of the system time, refer to

descriptions in

#unique_28/unique_28_Connect_42_SECTION_ULS_CLJ_X4B

8 Result Display Window

Displays the measurement results and statistics of various functions. Click or tap

the icon

at the lower-right corner of the screen to open or close the statistics

result display window.

9 Mode Switchover Icon

Temporally unavailable.

10 Function Icon Bar

Lists some of the function icons available in the navigation menu, easy for you to

perform quick operation for some functions.

11 Trigger Information Label

- Displays the trigger information of the system, including the trigger type,

trigger level, trigger mode, and etc.

- Click or tap the trigger information label, then the trigger setting window is

displayed. You can set the parameters for the trigger.

12 Horizontal Position Label

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Displays the current horizontal position. Click or tap this label to enter the

horizontal setting menu.

13 Sample Rate and Memory Depth Label

Displays the current sample rate and memory depth. Click or tap this label to enter

the horizontal setting menu.

14 Horizontal Time Base Label

Displays the current horizontal time base. Click or tap this label to enter the

horizontal setting menu.

15 Operating Status

Displays the operating status of the instrument.

16 Waveform Display Area

Displays the measurement waveform window for CH1-CH4. Click or tap at the

upper-right corner of the window to close the window. Click or tap

to enter

the configuration menu of the specified function.

4.4.4 Secondary 3.5-inch Touch Screen

The 3.5-inch small screen at the right side of the front panel is called a secondary

touch screen. The secondary touch screen separates menus and functions from

signals and analysis with a customized function and shortcut menu. You can adjust

the inclination of the main display.

Smart Quick-Responsive Shortcut Key Menu

The touch-enabled operation of DS70000 series oscilloscope can be operated on

both the main and secondary touch screens.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.13 Smart Quick-Responsive Keyboard Interface

1 Multifunction Knob Operation Icon

The icon under the multifunction knob shows the current function of the knob. The

icon changes with the selected quick shortcut key. You can use the multifunction

knob above the icon to perform the specified function operation.

Let's take an example by illustrating the knob operation in

Figure 4.13

. In the

current interface, rotating this knob can adjust the horizontal time base of the

oscilloscope; pressing down the knob can switch between the fine adjustment and

coarse adjustment for the horizontal time base.

Multifunction Knob Operation Icon

The icon under the multifunction knob shows the current function of the knob. The

icon changes with the selected quick shortcut key. You can use the multifunction

knob above the icon to perform the specified function operation.

Let's take an example by illustrating the knob operation in

Figure 4.13

. In the

current interface, pressing down the knob can open or close the horizontal menu.

3 Multifunction Knob Operation Icon

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

The icon under the multifunction knob shows the current function of the knob. The

icon changes with the selected quick shortcut key. You can use the multifunction

knob above the icon to perform the specified function operation.

Let's take an example by illustrating the knob operation in

Figure 4.13

. In the

current interface, rotating this knob can adjust the horizontal position of the

oscilloscope; pressing down the knob can set the horizontal position to zero.

4 SCALE Knob Operation Icon

The icon above the SCALE knob shows function of the knob. The knob below the

icon is used to adjust the vertical scale of the four channels. Rotating the knob for

the specified channel can adjust the vertical scale of the channel; pressing down

the knob can switch between the fine adjustment and coarse adjustment for the

vertical scale.

5 OFFSET Knob Operation Icon

The icon above the SCALE knob shows function of the knob. The knob below the

icon is used to adjust the vertical offset of the four channels. Rotating the knob for

the specified channel can adjust the vertical offset of the channel; pressing down

the knob can set the vertical offset to zero.

6 Quick-Responsive Shortcut Key Menu

Tap the quick shortcut key on the secondary touch screen to enter the specified

function menu or enable the specified function. There are two menu pages and

you can tap left and right to switch between the menu pages.

Flip Screen Adjustment Interface

The main display of the DS70000 series oscilloscope can be adjusted with one-button

electric tilt. You can tilt the main display on the secondary touch screen. Press the

button at the upper-right corner of the front panel to enter the tilt

adjustment menu interface for the main display, as shown in

Figure 4.14

. Press the

button again to go back to the quick-responsive shortcut key menu

interface.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.14 Flip Screen Adjustment Interface

1 Current Interface Operation

"Flip Screen" indicates that in the current interface, you can tilt the main display of

the oscilloscope.

2 Multifunction Knob Function Icon

Above the icon is the Multifunction knob. The icon shows the function of this

knob. Pressing down this knob can reset the tilt of the main display to zero;

rotating the knob can adjust the tilt.

3 Flip Screen Angle Percentage

Indicates the tilt percentage of the main display to the max. tilt available for the

main display.

4 Tilt Adjustment

Tap to drag the icon to adjust the tilt of the main display.

5 Saved Tilt Angle

This oscilloscope supports users to save three commonly used tilt angle values for

the main display. The instructions below show how to adjust the tilt of the main

display.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

a Drag the "Tilt Adjustment" icon to adjust the main display to a required tilt

angle.

b Long press the "Saved Tilt Angle" icon to save the current tilt angle of the main

display. After completing setting a tilt angle for the main display, the tilt

percentage value will be shown on the icon.

c For future use, you just need to tap the icon with a specified tilt angle on it to

make the main display to reach the specified tilt.

Caution

During adjusting the tilt of the main display, keep hands clear of the flip screen to avoid

being pinched.

4.5 Touch Screen Gestures

The instrument provides a super large capacitive touch screen, which is convenient for

users to operate and make configurations. It has strong waveform display capability

and excellent user experience. It features great convenience, high flexibility, and great

sensitivity. The actions supported by the touch screen controls include tapping,

pinching&stretching, as well as dragging.

4.5.1 Tap

Use one finger to tap the symbol or characters on the screen slightly, as shown in

Figure 4.15

. With the Tap gesture, you can perform the following operation:

• Tap the menu displayed on the screen to operate on the menu.

• Tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the touch screen

to enable the function navigation.

• Tap the displayed numeric keypad to set the parameters.

• Tap the virtual keypad to set the label name and the filename.

• Tap the close window icon at the upper-right corner of the prompt message box

to close it.

• Tap the other windows displayed on the screen to operate on the window.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.15 Tap Gesture

4.5.2 Pinch&Stretch

Pinch or stretch two points on the screen with two fingers to zoom in or out the

waveform. To zoom in the waveform, first pinch the two fingers and then stretch the

fingers; to zoom out the waveform, first stretch the two fingers, and then pinch the

fingers together, as shown in the figure below. With the pinch&stretch gesture, you

can perform the following operation:

• Pinching&stretching in the horizontal direction can adjust the horizontal time

base of the waveform.

• Pinching&stretching in the vertical direction can adjust the vertical scale of the

waveform.

Figure 4.16 Pinch&Stretch Gesture

4.5.3 Drag

Use one finger to select the object, and then drag the object to a destination place, as

shown in

Figure 4.17

. With the drag gesture, you can perform the following

operation:

• Drag the waveform to change its position or scale.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

• Drag the window controls to change the position of the window (e.g. numeric

keypad).

• Drag the cursor to change the position of the cursor.

• In multi-window display, drag one of the displayed windows to change its

position on the screen.

Figure 4.17 Drag Gesture

4.6 Parameter Setting Method

For this instrument, you can use the knob and touch screen operation to set

parameters. The common parameter setting methods are as follows:

• Method 1: Some parameters can be adjusted by rotating the knob on the front

panel.

• Method 2: Click or tap the input field of a specified parameter, then a virtual

keypad is displayed. Complete the parameter setting with the keypad.

Input Chinese and English Characters

When naming a label, this instrument supports Chinese/English input method. The

following part introduces how to input Chinese and English characters with the

Chinese/English input method.

• Input English Characters

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.18 English Input Interface

1 Select English input method

First check the input method type. If it shows “En/中”, then go to Step 2; if it

shows “中/En”, click or tap the input method switchover key to switch to

“En/中” (English input method).

2 Clear the name input area

If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to the next step. If

there are characters in the "Name Input Area", click or tap the Backspace key

to delete all the characters from the "Name Input Area" in order.

3 Input the upper-case letter

If you want to input an upper-case letter, first use the Caps key to switch

between the upper-case and lower-case mode. If the Caps key is selected,

input the upper-case letter with the virtual keypad. If not, first click or tap the

Caps key to ensure it is selected, then input the upper-case letter. All the input

letters will be displayed in the "Name Input Area”.

4 Input the lower-case letter

Refer to the operation specified in the previous step. If the Caps key is not

selected, directly input the lower-case letter.

5 Input numbers or symbols

If the letter keypad is displayed, you need to tap the numeric switchover key

to switch to the numeric keypad, and input numbers or symbols with the

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

numeric keypad. All the input letters will be displayed in the "Name Input

Area”.

6 Modify or delete the unwanted characters that have been input

During the name input process, you can modify or delete the unwanted

character if necessary. To delete the characters that have been input, click or

tap the Backspace key in the virtual keypad to delete the characters. To

modify the characters that have been input, delete the unwanted characters

first and then input the new characters.

You can directly move the cursor to the character to be modified or deleted,

delete the desired character or input the new characters after deleting the

unwanted character.

7 Confirm the input

After completing the input operation, click or tap “OK”.

• Input Chinese Characters

Figure 4.19 Chinese Input Interface

1 Select Chinese input method

First check the input method type. If it shows “中/En””, then go to Step 2;

if it shows “En/中”, click or tap the input method switchover key to switch to

“中/En” (Chinese input method).

2 Clear the name input area

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to the next step. If

there are characters in the "Name Input Area", click or tap the Backspace key

to delete all the characters from the "Name Input Area" in order.

If there are characters in the "Pinyin Input Area", when you delete characters

from the name input area, the characters in the Pinyin input area will be

deleted first.

3 Input Chinese characters

Click or tap the characters in the virtual keypad to input Pinyin into the input

area, then the characters to be selected will be displayed in the Chinese

character selection area. Slide to view more Chinese characters for you to

choose. Select the desired Chinese character, and then the selected character

will be displayed in the input area.

4 Modify or delete the unwanted characters that have been input

During the name input process, you can modify or delete the unwanted

character if necessary. To delete the characters that have been input, click or

tap the Backspace key in the virtual keypad. To modify the characters that

have been input, delete the unwanted characters first and then input the new

characters.

5 Confirm the input

After completing the input operation, click or tap “OK”.

Input a String

When naming a file or folder, you need to input a string with the keypad shown in

Figure 4.20

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 4.20 String Keypad

1 Clear the name input area

If there is no character in the "Name Input Area", please go to the next step. If

there are characters in the "Name Input Area", click or tap the Backspace key to

delete all the characters from the "Name Input Area" in order.

2 Input the upper-case letter

If you want to input an upper-case letter, first use the Caps key to switch between

the upper-case and lower-case mode. If the Caps key is selected, input the upper-

case letter with the virtual keypad. If not, first click or tap the Caps key to ensure it

is selected, then input the upper-case letter. All the input letters will be displayed

in the "Name Input Area”.

3 Input the lower-case letter

Refer to the operation specified in the previous step. If the Caps key is not

selected, directly input the lower-case letter.

4 Input numbers or symbols

If the letter keypad is displayed, you need to click or tap the numeric switchover

key to switch to the numeric keypad, and input numbers or symbols with the

numeric keypad. All the input letters will be displayed in the "Name Input Area”.

5 Modify or delete the unwanted characters that have been input

During the name input process, you can modify or delete the unwanted character

if necessary. To delete the characters that have been entered, click or tap the

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

Backspace key in the virtual keypad. To modify the characters that have been

entered, delete the unwanted characters first and then input the new characters.

You can directly move the cursor to the character to be modified or deleted, delete

the desired character or input the new characters after deleting the unwanted

character.

6 Confirm the input

After completing the input operation, click or tap “OK”.

Input a Value

When setting or modifying a parameter, input an appropriate value with the keypad

Figure 4.21

Figure 4.21 Numeric Keypad

Click or tap the value or unit in the numeric keypad to complete the input. After you

input all the values and select the desired units, the numeric keypad is turned off

automatically. This indicates that you have completed parameter setting. Besides,

after you have input the values, you also also press “OK“ directly to close the

numeric keypad. At this time, the unit of the parameter is the default unit. In the

numeric keypad, you can perform the following operation:

• Deletes the parameter value that has been input;

• Sets the parameter value to a maximum or minimum value;

• Sets the parameter to a default value;

• Clears the parameter value.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

4.7 To Use the Built-in Help System

The help system of this oscilloscope provides instructions for all the function keys on

the front panel and their corresponding menu keys. Click or tap

> Help to enter

the help system.

Figure 4.22 Help Information

After opening the help interface, you can get its help information by clicking on or

tapping the link for the desired item.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

4.8 To View the Option Information and the Option

Installation

DS70000 series oscilloscope provides multiple options to fulfill your measurement

requirements. If you need any of these options, order them according to the Order

No. available in "

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

", and then install the options

according to this section. Besides, you can also view the options currently installed on

the oscilloscope or activate the newly purchased option.

1 View the installed option

The instrument is installed with the trial versions of the options before leaving

factory. When you power on the instrument for the first time, the trial time is

about 2,160 minutes. If your instrument has currently installed the options,

perform the following operations to view the name of the installed option and

other detailed information about the option.

- Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select Utility to enter the utility function menu.

- Click or tap Option list to view the options currently installed.

2 Install the option

The option license is a string of fixed characters. The license file should be in

specific format, with the filename extension ".lic". After you purchase an option,

you will obtain a key (used for obtaining desired the option license code). Then,

you can install the option according to the following steps.

a Obtain an option license

a Log in to the RIGOL official website (

http://www.rigol.com

), click License

Activation to enter the "Registered product license code" interface.

b In the software license registration interface, input the correct key, serial

number (click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner

of the screen, then select Utility > About to obtain the serial number of the

instrument), and verification code. Then click Generate to obtain the option

license. If you need to use the option license file, please click the link to

download the file to the root directory of the USB storage device.

b Install the option

a Confirm that the option license file is located in the root directory of the USB

storage device, and connect the USB storage device to the oscilloscope

properly.

b Install the option by sending SCPI commands. For details, refer to

DS70000

Programming Guide.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

c After installation, a prompt message "Option activated successfully" is

displayed. After the option has been installed, you are recommended to

restart the instrument.

Tip

• Only 1 option license file of one instrument is allowed to be stored in the same USB

storage device, but the USB storage device can store the option license file of several

different instruments. You are not allowed to modify the licensed filename.

• During the installation process, you are not allowed to power off the instrument or pull

out the USB storage device.

• Sending the SCPI commands (:SYSTem:OPTion:INSTall <license>) to install options is

supported. Installing options by inputting the license code manually is not supported.

Quick Start

DS70000 User Guide

5 To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 series oscilloscope provides four analog input channels (CH1-CH4), and

each channel is equipped with an independent vertical control system. The setting

methods for the vertical systems of the four channels are the same. This chapter takes

CH1 as an example to introduce the setting method for the vertical system.

Enable the touch screen operation and tap the channel status label at the bottom of

the screen. Then the menu shown in the following figure is displayed.

Figure 5.1 Vertical Menu for Channel

5.1 To Enable or Disable the Analog Channel

Enable the analog channel

When a signal is connected to CH1, you can enable the channel by the following

methods.

• Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen to enable the

channel.

• Press the front-panel key to enable the channel, and the backlight of this

key and the corresponding channel key is illuminated.

• In

To Set the Vertical System

menu, select the CH1 tab, click or tap ON for the

Display menu item to turn CH1 on, and select OFF to turn CH1 off.

When the channel is selected, its channel status label at the bottom of the screen is

shown in the figure below.

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

The information displayed in the channel status label is related to the current channel

setting (irrelevant with the on/off status of the channel). After the channel is turned

on, modify the parameters such as the vertical scale, horizontal time base, trigger

mode, and trigger level according to the input signal for easy observation and

measurement of the waveform.

If CH1 is enabled but not activated, the channel status label is shown in the following

figure.

Click/tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen or press the button

on the front panel to activate the channel CH1.

Disable the analog channel

Disable the analog channels by using the following several methods.

• If CH1 has been enabled and activated, you can press on the front panel

to disable it directly. You can also click or tap the channel status label at the

bottom of the screen to disable the channel. If CH1 is disabled, the channel

status label is shown in the figure below.

• If CH1 has been enabled but not activated, first click or tap the CH1 channel

status label at the bottom of the screen, then click or tap it again to disable CH1.

• In

To Set the Vertical System

, you can also disable the channel by setting Display

to OFF.

• Also, you can tap to slide down the channel label to disable the channel.

5.2 To Adjust the Vertical Scale

Vertical scale indicates the voltage value per grid in the vertical axis of the screen. It is

often expressed in V/div. While you adjust the vertical scale, the display amplitude of

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

the waveform would enlarge or reduce. The scale information of the channel status

label at the bottom of the screen would change accordingly.

The adjustable range of the vertical scale is related to the currently set probe ratio

and input impedance. By default, the probe ratio is 1X and the input impedance is 1

MΩ. In this case, the adjustable range of the vertical scale is from 1 mV/div to 10 V/

div.

Caution

When the vertical scale is 1 mV/div and 2 mV/div, the 250M bandwidth limit will be

enabled automatically.

When CH1 is turned on, you can adjust the vertical scale with the following methods:

• Rotate the knob that corresponds to CH1 to adjust the vertical scale (clockwise

to reduce the scale and counterclockwise to increase).

• Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the vertical scale with the

pinch & stretch gesture on the touch screen. For details, refer to descriptions in

Pinch&Stretch

• In the Vertical system menu, click or tap the icon at the right side of the input

field of Scale to increase or decrease the scale value. You can also tap the input

field to input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

In the Vertical system menu, select ON or OFF to enable or disable the fine

adjustment. By default, it is OFF. You can also press down the vertical scale knob on

the small screen to enable or disable the fine adjustment.

• Fine adjustment: Click or tap the icon at the right section of the Scale menu to

further adjust the vertical scale within a relatively smaller range to improve

vertical resolution. If the amplitude of the input waveform is a little bit greater

than the full scale under the current scale and the amplitude would be a little bit

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

lower if the next scale is used, fine adjustment can be used to improve the

amplitude of waveform display to view signal details.

• Coarse adjustment: Click or tap the icon at the right section of the Scale menu

to adjust the vertical scale at 1-2-5 step, i.e. 1 mV/div, 2 mV/div, 5 mV/div, 10

mV/div…10 V/div.

5.3 To Adjust the Vertical Offset

Vertical offset indicates the offset of the signal ground level position of the waveform

from the screen center in the vertical direction. Its unit is consistent with the currently

selected amplitude unit (refer to "

Amplitude Unit

"). When adjusting the vertical offset,

the waveforms of the corresponding channel moves up and down. The vertical offset

information (as shown in the following figure) in the channel status label at the

bottom of the screen will change accordingly.

The adjustable range of the vertical scale is related to the currently set probe ratio

and input impedance.

When CH1 is turned on, you can adjust the vertical scale with the following methods:

• Rotate the OFFSETknob at the right section of the front panel to adjust the

vertical offset within the adjustable range. Rotate this knob clockwise to increase

the vertical offset, and rotate it counterclockwise to reduce the vertical offset.

Pressing down the knob can quickly reset the vertical offset (set the vertical

offset to 0).

• Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the vertical offset with the

drag gesture. For details, refer to the "

Drag

" section.

• Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. Then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Click or tap the Up and Down arrow icon at the right

side of the input field of Offset to increase or decrease the offset value. You can

also tap the input field to input a specific value with the displayed numeric

keypad.

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

5.4 Channel Coupling

The undesired signals can be filtered out by setting the coupling mode. For example,

the signal under test is a square waveform with DC offset.

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. Then the Vertical

menu is displayed. Click or tap the drop-down button of the Coupling menu to select

the coupling mode.

• When the coupling mode is "DC": the DC and AC components of the signal

under test can both pass the channel.

• When the coupling mode is "AC": the DC components of the signal under test

are blocked.

• When the coupling mode is "GND": the DC and AC components of the signal

under test are blocked.

After selecting the coupling mode, the currently selected coupling mode is displayed

in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, as shown in the figure below.

Tip

When the input impedance is set to "50 Ω", the channel coupling is set to DC coupling by

force, and the

Coupling menu is grayed out and cannot be modified.

5.5 BW Limit

This oscilloscope supports the bandwidth limit function. Setting the bandwidth limit

can reduce the noises in the displayed waveforms. For example, the signal under test

is a pulse with high frequency oscillation.

• When the bandwidth limit is disabled, the high frequency components of the

signal under test can pass the channel.

• If you enable the bandwidth limit and limit it to 20 MHz or 250 MHz, the high

frequency components found in the signal under test that are greater than 20

MHz or 250 MHz are attenuated.

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. Then the Vertical

menu is displayed. Click or tap the drop-down button of the BW Limit menu to select

OFF, 20 M, or 250 M. By default is OFF.

When the bandwidth limit is enabled, the character "Bw" will be displayed in the

channel status label at the bottom of the screen.

Table 5.1 BW Limit

Input Impedance of the Oscilloscope Available Bandwidth Limit

50 Ω 20 MHz, 250 MHz, 1 GHz or 2 GHz

1 MΩ 20 MHz, 250 MHz

Tip

Bandwidth limit can not only reduce the noise, but also can attenuate or eliminate the high

frequency components of the signal.

5.6 Input Impedance

To reduce the circuit load between the oscilloscope and the circuit under test, this

oscilloscope provides two input impedance modes: 1 MΩ (default) and 50 Ω. In the

Vertical system menu, click or tap to select “1 MΩ” or “50 Ω” under Impedance.

• 1 MΩ: The input impedance of the oscilloscope is very high, and the current

flowed from the circuit under test can be ignored.

• 50 Ω: makes the oscilloscope match with the device whose input impedance is

50 Ω.

After modifying the input impedance value, the circuit diagram in the Vertical system

menu will also be changed, as shown in the figure below.

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 5.2 Input Impedance Modification

Tip

• After the oscilloscope recognizes the probe automatically, the input impedance will also

be auto recognized. You do not have to set it manually.

• The setting of the input impedance will affect the ranges of channel vertical scale and

offset.

5.7 Waveform Invert

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, and then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Then click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Invert menu

item to enable/disable the waveform invert function.

When enabled, the channel label is shown in the following figure.

When the waveform invert is turned off, the waveform is displayed normally; when

the waveform invert is turned on, the voltage values of the displayed waveform are

inverted, as shown in the figure below. Enabling the waveform invert will also change

the result of math function, waveform measurement, etc.

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 5.3 Waveform Invert

Tip

When the waveform invert is turned on, the trigger (e.g. Edge trigger, Pulse trigger, or Slope

trigger) edge or polarity will be changed.

5.8 Probe

The analog channel of this oscilloscope not only supports the common passive probe,

but also the active probe. It can automatically recognize the currently connected

probe type and its probe ratio. For detailed technical information of the probes,

please refer to the corresponding Probe User Guide.

Enable the touch screen operation and tap the channel status label at the bottom of

the screen. Then the menu Vertical is displayed. Then click or tap Probe to enter the

Probe setting menu, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5.4 Probe Setting Menu

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

If the instrument works with the RP7000, PVA7000, or PVA8000 series probe, the

probe menu is shown in the figure below. You cannot set the probe ratio and need to

calibrate the probe. For specific probe models, please refer to

DS70000 Data Sheet

For detailed technical information of the probes, please refer to the corresponding

Probe User Guide.

Figure 5.5 RP7000/PVA7000/PVA8000 Series Probe Setting Menu

Slide to select the channel number (CH1-CH4), or click/tap the channel number to

switch to probe setting interface for different channels.

Probe Ratio

The oscilloscope allows you to set the probe attenuation manually. To obtain the

correct measurement results, you must set the probe ratio properly. By default, the

probe ratio is 1X.

The probe ratio values available are as shown in the following table.

Table 5.2 Probe Ratio

Attenuation

(display amplitude of the signal: actual

amplitude of the signal)

0.0001X

0.0002X

0.0005X

0.001X

0.0001:1

0.0002:1

0.0005:1

0.001:1

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

Attenuation

(display amplitude of the signal: actual

amplitude of the signal)

0.002X

0.005X

0.01X

0.02X

0.05X

0.1X

0.2X

0.5X

1X (default)

10X

20X

50X

100X

200X

500X

1000X

2000X

5000X

10000X

20000X

50000X

0.002:1

0.005:1

0.01:1

0.02:1

0.05:1

0.1:1

0.2:1

0.5:1

1:1

2:1

5:1

10:1

20:1

50:1

100:1

200:1

500:1

1000:1

2000:1

5000:1

10000:1

20000:1

50000:1

Tip

The oscilloscope auto-recognizes certain probes with a fixed attenuation ratio. After being

recognized, the probe ratio will also be auto recognized. You do not have to set it manually.

Skew

Click or tap the input field of Skew to set the delay time for the probe. Its range is

from -100.00 ns to 100.00 ns. The default value is 0.00 s.

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

Bias

When working with the RP7000/PVA7000/PVA8000 series probe, click or tap the input

field of Bias to set the bias voltage of the probe.

Probe Information

In the probe menu, you can view information about the currently connected probe,

such as the vendor, model, serial number, and the last calibration time.

Probe Calibration

Click or tap Calibration to start the calibration operation. Then the self-calibration

window is displayed, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5.6 SelfCal

Click or tap Exit in the self-calibration window to cancel the probe calibration at any

time. Click or tap Close to close the current self-calibration window. After completing

the calibration for the probe, the measurement results can be more accurate.

Tip

If the current channel is disabled, launching the self-calibration will enable the current channel

automatically. During the self-calibration, the touch-enabled operation is disabled.

Go Back to the Vertical System Menu

In the

Probe setting menu, click or tap the Vertical menu to go back to the Vertical

system menu.

5.9 Amplitude Unit

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, and then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Click or tap the drop-down button of the Unit text box to

select W, A, V, or U. The default unit is V.

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

When the amplitude unit is changed, the unit related to the channel will also be

changed accordingly.

5.10 Bias

When you use an oscilloscope to make actual measurements, a small offset that arises

from the temperature drift of the component or external environment disturbance

may occur on the zero-cross voltage of the channel, which will affect the

measurement results of the vertical parameters. DS70000 series oscilloscope allows

you to set an offset calibration voltage for calibrating the zero point of the

corresponding channel, so as to improve the accuracy of the measurement results.

Click or tap the Up and Down arrow icon at the right side of the input field of Bias to

increase or decrease the bias value. You can also tap the input field to input a specific

value with the displayed numeric keypad.

The range of bias is related to the input impedance and the vertical scale.

Tip

If the zero-cross voltage of the channel has a larger amplitude offset that exceeds the

adjustable null range, please perform self-calibration for the instrument to ensure the

measurement accuracy.

5.11 Channel Delay

When using an oscilloscope for actual measurement, the transmission delay of the

probe cable may bring relatively greater errors (zero offset). This series oscilloscope

allows you to set a delay time for calibrating the zero offset of the corresponding

channel. Zero offset is defined as the offset of the crossing point of the waveform and

trigger level line relative to trigger position, as shown in the figure below.

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 5.7 Zero Offset

In the "Vertical" menu, click or tap the input field for the Ch-Ch Skew item to set the

channel-to-channel skew time. The available range is from -100 ns to 100 ns.

5.12 Channel Label

The instrument uses the channel number to mark the corresponding channel by

default. For ease of use, you can also set a label for each channel. For example,

Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen, then the Vertical

menu is displayed. Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Label menu item to select

whether to display the channel label. You can can also tap the channel label input

field to input a specific name for the channel label with the pop-up numeric keypad.

For the methods of using the numeric keypad, refer to descriptions in

Parameter

Setting Method

To Set the Vertical System

DS70000 User Guide

6 To Set the Horizontal System

To enter the Horizontal system menu, perform any of the following operations:

• Click or tap the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. Then the

Vertical menu is displayed. Click or tap Acquisition to enter the Horizontal

system menu.

• When the multi-function knob selects the horizontal function, tap the

Horizontal button on the small screen to enter the Horizontal system menu.

• Click or tap the horizontal time base label (“H” icon), acquisition label (“A”

icon), or horizontal position label (“D” icon) at the top of the screen to enter

the Horizontal system menu.

Figure 6.1 Horizontal System Menu

To Set the Horizontal System

DS70000 User Guide

6.1 To Adjust the Horizontal Time Base

Horizontal time base, also called the horizontal scale, refers to the time of each grid in

the horizontal direction of the screen. It is usually expressed in s/div. The range of the

horizontal time base is from 50.00 ps/div to 1.00 ks/div. By default, it is 5 ns/div.

While you change the horizontal time base, the displayed waveforms of all channels

are expanded or compressed (refer to “

Horizontal Expansion

”) horizontally relative

to the current selected horizontal reference baseline. The horizontal time base at the

upper-left corner of the screen will be changed accordingly, as shown in the figure

below.

You can adjust the horizontal time base with the following methods.

• In the Horizontal system menu, click or tap the icon at the right side of the input

field of Scale to increase or decrease the horizontal time base. You can also click

the input field to input a specific value with the displayed numeric keypad.

• Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the horizontal time base with

the Pinch&Stretch gesture. For details, refer to the "

Pinch&Stretch

" section.

In the Horizontal system menu, you can click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Vernier

menu to enable or disable the fine adjustment function.

• Coarse adjustment: Click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of

Scale to adjust the horizontal time base of the waveforms of all channels at

1-2-5 step within the adjustable range.

• Fine adjustment: Click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field of Scale

to adjust the horizontal time base of the waveforms of all channels at a smaller

step within the adjustable range.

6.2 To Adjust the Horizontal Position

Horizontal position, also called trigger position, refers to the trigger point position of

the waveforms of all channels in the horizontal direction relative to the screen center.

When the waveform trigger point is at the left (right) side of the screen center, the

horizontal position is a positive (negative) value.

To Set the Horizontal System

DS70000 User Guide

While you change the horizontal position, the waveform trigger points and the

displayed waveforms of all channels are moved left and right. The horizontal position

at the top of the screen changes accordingly, as shown in the figure below.

You can adjust the horizontal position with the following methods.

• Enable the touch screen function, and then adjust the horizontal position with

the drag gesture. For details, refer to the "

Drag

" section.

• In the "Horizontal" menu, click or tap the icon at the right side of the input field

of Position to increase or decrease the horizontal position, as shown in the

figure below.

• You can also click or tap the input field of Position to input a specific value with

the displayed numeric keypad.

6.3 Delayed Sweep

Delayed sweep can be used to enlarge a length of waveform horizontally to view

waveform details. In the Horizontal system menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the

Zoom menu to enable or disable the delayed sweep function. When the delayed

sweep is enabled, you can set the scale and offset for the delayed sweep.

• Scale: Click or tap the icon at the right of the Scale input field under the Zoom

menu to increase or decrease the zoom scale. You can also click or tap the value

input box to input the specific value directly via the pop-up numeric keypad.

• Position:Click or tap the Left/Right arrow icon at the right of the Position input

field to increase/decrease the position. You can also click or tap the value input

box to input the specific value directly via the pop-up numeric keypad.

To Set the Horizontal System

DS70000 User Guide

In delayed sweep mode, the screen is divided into two display areas, as shown in the

following figure.

Figure 6.2 Delayed Sweep Mode

• Waveform before enlargement:

The waveform in the area that is not covered by subtransparent blue in the

upper part of the screen is the waveform before enlargement. Its horizontal time

base (also called main time base) is displayed at the upper-left corner of the

screen. You can move the area left and right by adjusting the horizontal position;

increase or decrease the size of the area by adjusting the horizontal scale.

• Waveform after enlargement:

The waveform in the lower part of the screen is the horizontally expanded

delayed sweep waveform. Its horizontal time base (also called the time base of

the delayed sweep) is displayed on the screen. Compared with the main time

base, the time base of the delayed sweep has increased the waveform resolution.

Tip

The time base of the delayed sweep should be smaller than or equal to the main time base.

To Set the Horizontal System

DS70000 User Guide

7 To Set the Sample System

You can set the sample system in the

To Set the Horizontal System

menu.

Figure 7.1 Horizontal System Menu

7.1 Acquisition Mode

The acquisition mode is used to control how to generate waveform points from the

sample points. In the Horizontal system menu, click or tap the desired acquisition

mode for the Acquisition menu. The available choices include Normal, Average, Peak,

High Res. By default, the acquisition mode is Normal. The acquisition mode will be

displayed in the acquisition label at the top of the screen.

Normal

In this mode, the oscilloscope samples the signal at a specified fixed time interval to

rebuild the waveform. For most of the waveforms, using this mode can produce the

optimal display effects.

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

Average

In this mode, the oscilloscope averages the waveforms from multiple samples to

reduce the random noise of the input signal and improve the vertical resolution.

Greater number of averages can lower the noise and increase the vertical resolution;

while at the same time, it will slow the response of the displayed waveform to the

waveform changes.

When you select "Average" mode, click or tap the input field for the Averages menu

item to set it by using the pop-up numeric keypad. Its range is from 2 to 65534. Its

default value is 8.

Tip

The number of averages must be the Nth power of 2. When it is not in N power-of-2

increments, a prompt message "Truncation average error" is displayed. At this time, a value

that is smaller than the one you input and the closest to N power-of-2 increments will be input

automatically. For example, if you input 9 with the numeric keypad, the average count will be

input 8 automatically.

Peak

In this mode, the oscilloscope acquires the maximum and minimum values of the

signal within the sample interval to get the envelope of the signal or the narrow pulse

that might be lost. In this mode, signal aliasing can be prevented, but the noise

displayed would be larger.

In this mode, the oscilloscope can display all the pulses whose pulse widths are at

least the same as the sample period.

High Resolution

This mode uses a kind of ultra-sample technique to average the neighboring points

of the sample waveform to reduce the random noise on the input signal and generate

much smoother waveforms on the screen. This is generally used when the sample

rate of the digital converter is higher than the storage rate of the acquisition memory.

When you select "High Res" mode, click or tap the drop-down button of bits to select

9, 10, 12, 14, or 16. Its default value is 9.

Tip

• The averaging modes of the "Average" and "High Res" are different. The former uses

"Multi-sample Average" and the latter uses "Single Sample Average".

• In "High Res" mode, the oscilloscope improves the measurement accuracy at the cost of

bandwidth. Each time the sampling rate changes, a window displaying the current

bandwidth appears in the sample rate menu.

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

7.2 Sampling Mode

This oscilloscope only supports the real-time sampling mode. In this mode, the

oscilloscope produces the waveform display from samples collected during one

trigger event. The max. real-time sample rate of this series is 20 GSa/s. The current

sample rate is displayed in the acquisition label at the top of the screen.

By default, the operating status label at the left top of the screen is in green,

indicating that the instrument is undergoing real-time sampling. Then the STOP/RUN

icon at the top of the screen is in green. Click or tap the STOP/RUN icon to stop

sampling, then the STOP/RUN icon turns red. The operating status label at the left

top of the screen shows STOP in red. At this time, the oscilloscope will maintain its

last captured graph. You can still expand or zoom the waveforms by using the

horizontal and vertical control menu.

7.3 Sample Rate

Sampling is the process of converting the analog signal into the digital signal at a

specified time interval and then restoring them in sequence. The sample rate is the

reciprocal of the time interval.

In the Horizontal system menu, "SampleRate" shows the current sample rate. The

current sample rate is displayed in the acquisition label at the top of the screen, as

shown in the figure below.

The sample rate of the analog channel is related to the current channel mode. The

maximum real-time sample rate in the single-channel mode is 20 GSa/s, and the

maximum real-time sample rate in the half-channel mode and full-channel mode is

10 GSa/s.

• Single-channel mode: CH1 and CH2 are considered as a group; CH3 and CH4

are considered as another group. If one of the two channels in each group is

enabled, it is called single-channel mode.

• Half-channel mode: CH1 and CH2 are considered as a group; CH3 and CH4 are

considered as another group. If two channels in either one of the groups are

enabled, it is called half-channel mode.

• Full-channel mode: CH1, CH2, CH3, and CH4 are all enabled.

The impact of low sample rate on the waveform:

• Waveform Distortion: when the sample rate is too low, some waveform details

are lost, and the sample waveform displayed is rather different from the actual

waveform of the signal.

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

• Waveform Aliasing: when the sample rate is twice lower than the actual signal

frequency (Nyquist Frequency), the frequency of the waveform rebuilt from the

sample data is smaller than the actual signal frequency.

• Waveform Leakage: when the sample rate is too low, the waveform rebuilt from

the sample data does not reflect all the actual signal information.

7.4 Memory Depth

Memory depth refers to the number of points of the oscilloscope that can store in

one trigger acquisition. It reflects the storage capability of the acquisition storage.

This oscilloscope is equipped with a standard memory depth of up to 1 Gpts (2 Gpts

for option).

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 7.2 Memory Depth

The following equation shows the relations among memory depth, sample rate, and

horizontal time base scale:

MDepth = SRate x TSCale x HDivs

•

MDepth:

indicates the memory depth. The unit is pts.

•

SRate:

indicates the sample rate. The unit is Sa/s.

•

TSCale:

indicates the horizontal time base scale. The unit is s/div.

•

HDivs:

indicates the number of grids in the horizontal direction. The unit is div.

Therefore, under the same horizontal time base scale, a higher memory depth can

ensure a higher sample rate.

In the Horizontal system menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Mem Depth to

select the memory depth. By default, the memory depth is 10 Kpts. The memory

depth value will be displayed in the sample rate label at the top of the screen.

• When only one of the following channels is enabled, the memory depths

available include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10 Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 100 Mpts, 200

Mpts, 500 Mpts, 1 Gpts, and 2 Gpts (option).

• When any two or multiple channels are enabled, the memory depths available

include Auto, 1 Kpts, 10 Kpts, 100 Kpts, 1 Mpts, 10 Mpts, 100 Mpts, 200 Mpts,

500 Mpts, and 1 Gpts.

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

Tip

In "Auto" mode, the oscilloscope selects the memory depth automatically according to the

current sample rate.

7.5 Anti-Aliasing

At a slower sweep speed, the sample rate is reduced, and a dedicated display

algorithm can be used to minimize the possibility of aliasing.

In the Horizontal system menu, the user can select the on or off tab for the Anti-

aliasing menu to enable or disable the anti-aliasing function.

This function should be enabled when the horizontal time base has a large deviation

from the period of the signal under test (e.g. when the horizontal time base is greater

than five-fold the period of the signal under test).

7.6 Horizontal Expansion

Horizontal expansion indicates the reference position that the screen waveform is

referenced to when it is horizontally expanded or compressed in adjusting the

horizontal time base. In the Horizontal system menu, click or tap the drop-down

button of Expand to select the horizontal reference baseline. The available choices

include Center, Left, Right, Trigger, and User. The default is "Center".

• Center: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be

expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the screen center.

• Left: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be expanded

or compressed horizontally relative to the leftmost position of the screen.

• Right: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be

expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the rightmost position of the

screen.

• Trigger: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform will be

expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the trigger point.

• User: when the horizontal time base is modified, the waveform displayed will be

expanded or compressed horizontally relative to the user-defined reference

position.

When you select "User", click or tap the input field of Expand User. Input the

horizontal expansion reference value with the displayed numeric keypad. Its

range is from -500 to 500. Its default value is 0.

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

7.7 XY Mode

By default, DS70000 series digital oscilloscope uses the YT mode for waveform

display window. In this mode, Y-axis indicates the Voltage, X-axis indicates the Time.

Besides, it supports XY display window. In this display window, X-axis and Y-axis

indicate voltage. The two input channels display from "Voltage-Time" to "Voltage-

Voltage".

Open the XY Window

To open the XY window, perform the following operations:

• Click or tap the Windows icon in the function navigation menu to enter the Add

Window interface. In the Diagram menu, click or tap "XY", and then click or tap

Add to open the XY mode display window.

• Click or tap the XY icon at the upper-right part of the screen to open the XY

window.

Configure the XY Window

Click or tap

at the upper-right corner of the XY window to enter the XY

configuration menu.

Figure 7.3 XY Setting Menu

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

• Source: Click or tap the drop-down button of "Source X" to select the source

channel of the X-axis in the XY window. Click or tap the drop-down button of

"Source Y" to select the source channel of the Y-axis in the XY window.

In the

Add Window

menu, you can also configure Source Z. Source Z, as the Z-

axis input in the XY display mode, is used to control whether to display the X-Y

waveforms in the XY display mode. This function is called "blanking".

- When "None" is selected for "Source Z", the blanking function is disabled,

and you can only see the X-Y waveforms.

- When you select "CH1-CH4" for "Source Z", the blanking function is

enabled. The Z-axis input from the external connector determines whether

to display the X-Y waveforms. When Z is high (the input level is greater than

0 V), the X-Y waveforms are displayed; when Z is low (the input level is

smaller than 0 V), the waveforms are hidden.

• Grid: Refer to

To Set the Screen Grid

Note

Advanced settings are not supported temporally. The current settings show the most optimal

display effects.

Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation

In this mode, you can use the Lissajous method to measure the phase deviation of the

two input signals whose frequencies are the same. The following figure shows the

measurement schematic diagram of phase deviation.

Figure 7.4 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation

According to sinƟ = A/B or C/D, Ɵ is the phase deviation angle between the two

channels. The definitions of A, B, C, and D are shown in the above figure. The phase

deviation angle is obtained, that is:

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

Ɵ = ±arcsin(A/B) or ±arcsin(C/D)

If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant I and III, the phase deviation

angle obtained should be within Quadrant I and IV, namely within (0 to π/2) or (3π/2

to 2π). If the principal axis of the ellipse is within Quadrant II and IV, the phase

deviation angle obtained should be within Quadrant II and III, namely within (π/2 to

π) or (π to 3π/2).

The XY mode can be used to measure the phase deviation occurred when the signal

under test passes through a circuit network. Connect the oscilloscope to the circuit to

monitor the input and output signals of the circuit.

To Set the Sample System

DS70000 User Guide

8 To Trigger the Oscilloscope

As for trigger, you set certain trigger condition according to the requirement and

when a waveform in the waveform stream meets this condition, the oscilloscope

captures this waveform as well as the neighboring part, and displays them on the

screen. For the digital oscilloscope, it samples waveform continuously no matter

whether it is stably triggered, but only stable trigger can be stably displayed. The

trigger module ensures that every time base sweep or acquisition starts from the

user-defined trigger condition, namely every sweep is synchronous with the

acquisition and the waveforms acquired is overlapped so as to display the stable

waveforms.

Trigger settings should be based on the features of the input signal. To quickly

capture the desired waveform, you need to understand the signal under test. This

oscilloscope provides abundant trigger types that help you focus on the desired

waveform details.

To enter the Trigger menu, perform any of the following operations:

• Click or tap the trigger icon (“T” icon) at the top of the screen;

• When the multi-function knob selects the trigger function, tap the Trigger icon

on the small screen at the right side of the large screen.

• In

To Set the Vertical System

menu, click or tap the Trigger button to enter the

trigger setting menu.

8.1 Trigger Source

In the "Trigger" menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the

desired source from the drop-down list. Analog channels (CH1-CH4), AC Line, or EXT

(external trigger) can all be selected as the trigger source.

Analog channel input

Signals input from analog channels CH1-CH4 can all be used as trigger sources. No

matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.

AC line input

The trigger signal is obtained from the AC power input of the oscilloscope. AC trigger

is usually used to measure signals relevant to the AC power frequency. For example,

stably triggering the waveform output from the transformer of a transformer

substation. It is mainly used in related measurements of the power industry.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

External trigger input

The external trigger source can be used to trigger on the fifth channel while all the

other four channels are acquiring data. The trigger signal (e.g. external clock or signal

of the circuit under test) will be connected to EXT trigger source via the external

trigger input terminal [EXT] connector. You can set the trigger conditions within the

range of the trigger level (from -8 V to +8 V).

8.2 Trigger Level

The adjustment of the trigger level is related to the type of the trigger source.

• When the trigger source is CH1-CH4, and when the multifunction knob selects

the trigger function, rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small

screen or drag the adjustment icon (as shown in the figure below) under the

Level menu to adjust the trigger level. During the adjustment, a trigger level line

(the color of the trigger level line is the same as that of the channel) and a

trigger label " " are displayed on the screen, and they move up and down

with the variation of the trigger level. When you stopping modifying the trigger

level, the trigger level line disappears in about 2 s. The current trigger level is

displayed in the the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

In Runt Trigger, Slope Trigger, and Window trigger, you need to set the upper

and lower limits of the trigger level. Rotate the knob

at the upper-right part

of the small screen or drag the adjustment icon under the Level menu to adjust

the trigger level. Two trigger level labels

and are displayed at the

right section of the screen.

• When the trigger source is AC Line, there is no trigger level.

• When the trigger source is EXT, rotate the knob

at the upper-right part of

the small screen or drag the adjustment icon under the

Level menu to adjust the

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

trigger level. The current trigger level is displayed in the the trigger information

label at the top of the screen.

For this trigger source, only the variation of the trigger level value is displayed

on the screen during the adjustment of the trigger level, without displaying the

trigger level lines on the screen.

To ensure the waveforms to be better triggered, for a trigger with a single level, you

can directly click or tap "50%" in the level menu or press down the trigger level knob

to make the level move to the middle of the waveform. However, for a trigger (e.g.

Slope trigger, Runt trigger, Window trigger, and MIL-STD-1553) with two levels, you

need to click or tap "90%" and "10%" in the level menu or press down the trigger

level knob to make the level move to within the range of the waveform amplitude.

8.3 Trigger Mode

The following is the schematic diagram of the acquisition memory. To easily

understand the trigger event, we classify the acquisition memory into the pre-trigger

buffer and post-trigger buffer.

Figure 8.1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory

After the system runs, the oscilloscope operates by first filling the pre-trigger buffer.

It starts searching for a trigger after the pre-trigger buffer is filled. While searching for

the trigger, the data sampled will still be transmitted to the pre-trigger buffer (the

new data will continuously overwrite the previous data). When a trigger is found, the

pre-trigger buffer contains the data acquired just before the trigger. Then, the

oscilloscope will fill the post-trigger buffer and display the data in the acquisition

memory. If the acquisition is activated via (RUN/STOP), the oscilloscope will

repeat this process; if the acquisition is activated via tapping the "Single" icon on the

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

small screen, the oscilloscope will stop after finishing a single acquisition (you can

pan and zoom the currently displayed waveform).

DS70000 provides Auto, Normal, and Single trigger modes, and the default is Auto.

Click or tap the trigger information label at the top of the screen or the "Trigger" icon

on the small screen to open the "Trigger" menu. Click or tap the sub-items for the

Sweep menu to quickly switch the current trigger mode. The trigger mode is

displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen: A (Auto), N

(Normal), and S (Single).

• Auto: In this trigger mode, if the specified trigger conditions are not found,

triggers are forced and acquisitions are made so as to display the waveforms.

This trigger mode should be used when the signal level is unknown or the DC

should be displayed as well as when forcible trigger is not necessary as the

trigger condition always occurs.

• Normal: In this trigger mode, triggers and acquisitions only occur when the

specified trigger conditions are found. This trigger mode should be used when

the signal is with low repetition rate or only the event specified by the trigger

setting needs to be sampled as well as when auto trigger should be prevented to

acquire stable display.

• Single: In this trigger mode, the oscilloscope performs a single trigger and

acquisition when the specified trigger conditions are found, and then stops. This

trigger mode should be used when you need to perform a single acquisition of

the specified event and analyze the acquisition result (you can pan and zoom the

currently displayed waveform, and the subsequent waveform data will not

overwrite the current waveform). After a single trigger mode is initiated, the

operating status of the oscilloscope is in "STOP" state.

In Normal and Single trigger modes, pressing Force in the trigger menu or the

"Force" icon on the small screen can generate a trigger signal forcibly.

8.4 Trigger Coupling

Trigger coupling decides which kind of components will be transmitted to the trigger

module. Please distinguish it from "

Channel Coupling

". This function is only valid

when the trigger type is Edge and the trigger source is an analog channel.

Click/tap the trigger information label at the top of the screen (as shown in the figure

below) or tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen to open the "Trigger" menu. Click

or tap the drop-down button of

Coupling to select the desired coupling mode (by

default, it is DC.) from the drop-down list.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

• DC: allows DC and AC components to pass the trigger path.

• AC: blocks the DC components and attenuates the signals.

• LFR: blocks the DC components and rejects the low-frequency components.

• HFR: rejects the high frequency components.

Tip

When "AC" or "LFR" is selected for the coupling mode, no trigger level lines and trigger icons

are displayed. When you adjust the trigger level, you can only see the changes of the trigger

level values in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.5 Trigger Holdoff

Trigger holdoff can be used to stably trigger on complex repetitive waveforms that

have multiple edges (or other events) between waveform repetitions (such as pulse

series). Holdoff time indicates the time that the oscilloscope waits for re-arming the

trigger module after generating a correct trigger. The oscilloscope will not trigger

even if the trigger condition is met during the holdoff time and will only re-arm the

trigger module after the holdoff time expires.

For example, to stably trigger the repetitive pulse series as shown in the figure below,

the holdoff time should be set to a value that is greater than t1 and smaller than t2.

Figure 8.2 Trigger Holdoff

Click or tap the trigger setting label (as shown in the figure below) on the top of the

screen to open the "Trigger" menu. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small

screen to open the trigger menu. Click or tap the input field of

Holdoff to input the

holdoff time (the holdoff to this time when the waveforms are stably triggered; by

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

default, the holdoff time is 8 ns) with the pop-up numeric keypad. The adjustable

range of the holdoff time is from 8 ns to 10 s.

8.6 Noise Rejection

Noise rejection can reject the high frequency noise in the signal and reduce the

possibility of miss-trigger of the oscilloscope.

Click or tap the trigger information label at the top of the screen or the "Trigger" icon

on the small screen to open the "Trigger" menu. Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the

Noise Reject menu to enable or disable the noise rejection function.

Tip

This function is only valid when the trigger source is an analog channel or EXT.

8.7 Trigger Type

DS70000 series oscilloscope provides the following trigger functions.

8.7.1 Edge Trigger

Triggers on the trigger level of the specified edge of the input signal.

Trigger Type

Click/tap the trigger information label at the top of the screen or tap the Trigger icon

on the small screen to open the "Trigger" menu. Click or tap the drop-down button of

Type to select "Edge" from the drop-down list.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.3 Edge Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) Back is displayed in the

trigger information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4, AC Line, or EXT. For

details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed

in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Edge Type

Click or tap the sub-item for the Slope menu to select the input signal edge on which

the oscilloscope triggers. It will be displayed in the trigger information label.

• Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level

meets the specified trigger level.

• Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level

meets the specified trigger level.

• Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the voltage

level meets the preset trigger level.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger coupling, trigger holdoff, and noise rejection)

under this trigger type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Coupling

Trigger

Holdoff

, and

Noise Rejection

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen. When the multi-function knob selects the

trigger function, rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen or

drag the adjustment icon under the Level menu to adjust the trigger level. For details,

refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the

trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.2 Pulse Trigger

Triggers on the positive or negative pulse with a specified width. In this mode, the

oscilloscope will trigger when the pulse width of the input signal satisfies the

specified pulse width condition.

In this oscilloscope, positive pulse width is defined as the time difference between the

two crossing points of the trigger level and positive pulse; negative pulse width is

defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of the trigger level

and negative pulse, as shown in the figure below.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.4 Positive Pulse Width/Negative Pulse Width

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Pulse" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for Pulse trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.5 Pulse Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Polarity

Selects the desired polarity.under the Polarity menu. The polarities available are

positive polarity ( ) and negative polarity ( ).

Trigger Condition

Sets the trigger condition in the When menu.

• When you select "Positive" for polarity, ">" for trigger condition, the oscilloscope

triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater than the

specified pulse width.

• When you select "Positive" for polarity, "<" for trigger condition, the oscilloscope

triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is smaller than the

specified pulse width.

• When you select "Positive" for polarity, "< >" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater

than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified

upper limit of pulse width.

• When you select "Negative" for polarity, ">" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater

than the specified pulse width.

• When you select "Negative" for polarity, "<" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is smaller

than the specified pulse width.

• When you select "Negative" for polarity, "< >" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater

than the specified lower limit of pulse width and smaller than the specified

upper limit of pulse width.

Pulse Width Setting

• Under the When menu, when ">" or "<" is set to trigger conditions, click or tap

the input field of Lower or Upper to set the lower limit value or the upper limit

value with the pop-up numeric keypad. The pulse range available is from 100 ps

to 10 s.

• Under the When menu, when "< >" is set to trigger conditions, click or tap the

input field of

Upper and Lower respectively to set the lower limit value and the

upper limit value with the pop-up numeric keypad. The lower limit of the pulse

width must be smaller than the upper limit.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger

type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen or drag the adjustment icon under the Level menu to

adjust the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current

trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.3 Slope Trigger

In Slope trigger, the oscilloscope triggers on the positive or negative slope of the

specified time. This trigger mode is applicable to ramp and triangle waveforms.

In this oscilloscope, positive slope time is defined as the time difference between the

two crossing points of trigger level line A and B with the rising edge; negative slope

time is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of trigger level

line A and B with the falling edge as shown in the figure below. as shown in the figure

below.

Figure 8.6 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Slope" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for Slope trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.7 Slope Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Edge Type

Select the input signal edge (under the Slope menu) on which the oscilloscope

triggers.

• Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal.

• Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal.

Trigger Condition:

Sets the trigger condition in the When menu.

• When you select "Rising" for the edge type, ">" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater

than the specified time.

• When you select "Rising" for the edge type, "<" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is smaller

than the specified time.

• When you select "Rising" for the edge type, "< >" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater

than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit

time.

• When you select "Falling" for the edge type, ">" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater

than the specified time.

• When you select "Falling" for the edge type, "<" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is smaller

than the specified time.

• When you select "Falling" for the edge type, "< >" for trigger condition, the

oscilloscope triggers when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater

than the specified lower limit time and smaller than the specified upper limit

time.

Slope Time Setting

• Under the When menu, when ">" or "<" is set to trigger conditions, click or tap

the input field of Lower or Upper to set the lower limit value or the upper limit

value with the pop-up numeric keypad. The available range of the slope time is

from 100 ps to 10 s.

• Under the

When menu, when "< >" is set to trigger conditions, click or tap the

input field of Upper and Lower respectively to set the lower limit value and the

upper limit value with the pop-up numeric keypad.

The lower slope time limit must be smaller than the upper slope time limit.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger

type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Select the level adjustment type under the Level Select menu.

• Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of

the trigger level remains unchanged.

• Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the

trigger level remains unchanged.

• Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,

and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower

limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.

When setting the trigger level, first select a level type and then tap the "Trigger" icon

on the small screen, rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen

or drag the adjustment icon under the Level A and Level B menu item to adjust the

level of Source A and Source B. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The

current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

8.7.4 Video Trigger

The video signal can include image information and timing information, which adopts

different standards and formats. DS70000 series can trigger on the standard video

signal field or line of NTSC (National Television Standards Committee), PAL (Phase

Alternating Line), or SECAM (Sequential Couleur A Memoire).

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Video" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for Video trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.8 Video Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Video Polarity

Selects the desired polarity under the Polarity menu. The polarities available are

positive polarity ( ) and negative polarity ( ).

Video Standard

Click or tap the drop-down button of Standard to select the desired video standard.

Table 8.1 Video Standard

Video Standard

Frame Frequency

(Frame)

Scan Type TV Scan Line

NTSC 30 Interlaced Scan 525

PAL/SECAM 25 Interlaced Scan 625

480p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 525

576p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 625

720p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 750

720p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 750

720p/30Hz 30 Progressive Scan 750

720p/25Hz 25 Progressive Scan 750

720p/24Hz 24 Progressive Scan 750

1080p/60Hz 60 Progressive Scan 1125

1080p/50Hz 50 Progressive Scan 1125

1080p/30Hz 30 Progressive Scan 1125

1080p/25Hz 25 Progressive Scan 1125

1080p/24Hz 24 Progressive Scan 1125

1080i/60Hz 60 Interlaced Scan 1125

1080i/50Hz 50 Interlaced Scan 1125

Sync

Selects the desired sync type from the drop-down list of the Sync menu.

• All Lines: triggers on the first line found.

• Line: triggers on the specified line.

When this sync type is selected, you can specify a line number. Click or tap the

input field of Line to set the line number by using the pop-up numeric keypad.

The range of the line number is related to the currently selected video standards.

The range is from 1 to 525 (NTSC), 1 to 625 (PAL/SECAM, 1 to 525 (480p), 1 to

625 (576p), 1 to 750 (720p), or 1 to 1125 (1080p/ 1080i).

• Odd: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the odd field. It is only

available when the video standard is set to "NTSC" or "PAL/SECAM".

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

• Even: triggers on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the even field. It is

only available when the video standard is set to "NTSC" or "PAL/SECAM".

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in "

Noise Reject

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen or drag the adjustment icon under the Level menu to

adjust the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current

trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Tip

• For a better observation of the waveform details in the video signal, you can set a larger

memory depth first.

• In the trigger debugging process of video signals, the frequency in different part of the

signal can be reflected by a different brightness, as RIGOL's digital oscilloscope provides

the intensity graded color display function. Experienced users can quickly judge the

signal quality and discover abnormalities during the debugging process.

8.7.5 Pattern Trigger

Identifies a trigger condition by searching for a specified pattern. This pattern is a

logical "AND" combination of channels. Each channel can be set to H (high), L (low),

or X (don't care). A rising or falling edge (you can only specify a single edge) can be

specified for one channel included in the pattern. When an edge is specified, the

oscilloscope will trigger at the edge specified if the pattern set for the other channels

are true (namely the actual pattern of the channel is the same as the preset pattern). If

no edge is specified, the oscilloscope will trigger on the last edge that makes the

pattern true. If all the channels in the pattern are set to "X", the oscilloscope will not

trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.9 Pattern Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Pattern" from the drop-down

list. Then set the parameters for the Pattern trigger.

Figure 8.10 Pattern Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

Pattern Setting

The following five patterns are available:

• 1: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "1", i.g. the voltage level is higher

than the trigger level of the channel.

• 0: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "0", i.g. the voltage level is lower

than the trigger level of the channel.

• X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.g. this channel is not used as

a part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the

oscilloscope will not trigger.

• : sets the pattern to the rising edge of the channel selected.

• : sets the pattern to the falling edge of the channel selected.

The Left/Right arrow key indicates moving left/right to switch the channel pattern.

"All" indicates all bits. Select a pattern for a channel, then click or tap All. The patterns

of all the other channels will be set to the currently selected pattern. The pattern

setting is shown in the figure below:

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Only one edge (rising or falling edge) can be specified in the pattern. If one edge item

is currently defined and then another edge item is defined in another channel in the

pattern, then a prompt message "Invalid input" is displayed.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger

type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen or drag the adjustment icon under the Level menu to

adjust the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current

trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.6 Duration Trigger

In duration trigger, the instrument identifies a trigger condition by searching for the

duration of a specified pattern. This pattern is a logical "AND" combination of the

channels. Each channel can be set to 1 (high), 0 (low), or X (don't care). The

instrument triggers when the duration (∆T) of this pattern meets the preset time, as

shown in the figure below.

Figure 8.11 Duration Trigger

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Trigger Type:

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Duration" from the drop-down

list. After selecting the trigger type, then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Figure 8.12 Duration Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

Pattern Setting

The following three patterns are available:

• 1: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "1", i.g. the voltage level is higher

than the trigger level of the channel.

• 0: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "0", i.g. the voltage level is lower

than the trigger level of the channel.

• X: sets the pattern of the channel selected to "X", i.g. this channel is not used as

a part of the pattern. When all channels in the pattern are set to "X", the

oscilloscope will not trigger.

The Left/Right arrow key indicates moving left/right to switch the channel pattern.

"All" indicates all bits. Select a pattern for a channel, then click or tap All. The patterns

of all the other channels will be set to the currently selected pattern.

Trigger Condition

Sets the trigger condition in the When menu.

• >: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the preset time. Click

or tap the input field of Lower to set the lower limit of the duration of the

pattern with the pop-up numeric keypad. Its range is from 100 ps to 10 s.

• <: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the preset time. Click

or tap the input field of Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the

pattern. Its range is from 100 ps to 10 s.

• < >: triggers when the duration of the pattern is smaller than the upper limit of

the preset time and greater than the lower limit of the preset time. Click or tap

the input field of Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern, and

the range is from 101 ps to 10 s. Click or tap the input field of Lower to set the

lower limit of the duration of the pattern, and the range is from 100 ps to 9.9 s.

The lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.

• > <: triggers when the duration of the pattern is greater than the upper limit of

the preset time or smaller than the lower limit of the preset time. Click or tap the

input field of

Upper to set the upper limit of the duration of the pattern, and the

range is from 100 ps to 10 s. Click or tap the input field of Lower to set the lower

limit of the duration of the pattern, and the range is from 100 ps to 9.9 s. The

lower time limit must be smaller than the upper time limit.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger

type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen or drag the adjustment icon under the Level menu to

adjust the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current

trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.7 Timeout Trigger

In Timeout trigger, the instrument triggers when the time interval (∆T) (the time from

when the rising edge (or falling edge) of the input signal passes through the trigger

level to the time from when the neighboring falling edge (or rising edge) passes

through the trigger level) is greater than the preset timeout value, as shown in

Figure

8.13

Figure 8.13 Timeout Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the trigger information label at the top of the screen, and then click or tap

the drop-down button of Type to select "Timeout" from the drop-down list. Then set

the parameters for the Timeout trigger in

Figure 8.14

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.14 Timeout Trigger Menu

At this time, the current trigger setting information (including trigger type, trigger

source, and trigger level) is displayed at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure

below. The information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Edge Type

Click or tap the edge type (under Slope) from which the input signal passes through

the trigger level.

• Rising: starts timing when the rising edge of the input signal passes through the

trigger level.

• Falling: starts timing when the falling edge of the input signal passes through

the trigger level.

• Either: starts timing when either edge of the input signal passes through the

trigger level.

Timeout Value

Timeout value represents the maximum time that the signal remains idle before the

signal passes through the trigger level. Click or tap the input field of Timeout, and

then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the timeout value of Timeout trigger. The

available range is from 16 ns to 10 s.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen or drag the adjustment icon under the Level menu to

adjust the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current

trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.8 Runt Trigger

This trigger mode is used to trigger pulses that pass through one trigger level but fail

to pass through another trigger level, as shown in the figure below.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.15 Runt Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Runt" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for Runt trigger.

Figure 8.16 Runt Trigger Setting Menu

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed at the top of the

screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

Polarity

Selects the pulse polarity of Runt trigger under the Polarity menu.

• Positive : triggers on the positive runt pulse.

• Negative : triggers on the negative runt pulse.

Trigger Condition

Sets the Runt trigger condition in the When menu.

• None: indicates not setting the trigger condition of Runt trigger.

• >: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit of pulse

width. Click or tap the input field of Lower to set the minimum pulse width of

Runt trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad.

• <: triggers when the runt pulse width is smaller than the upper limit of pulse

width. Click or tap the input field of Upper to set the maximum pulse width of

Runt trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad.

• < >: triggers when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit and

smaller than the upper limit of pulse width. Click or tap the input field of Upper

to set the maximum pulse width of Runt trigger with the pop-up numeric

keypad. Click or tap the input field of Lower to set the minimum pulse width of

Runt trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad. The lower limit of the pulse width

must be smaller than the upper limit.

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Select the level adjustment type under the Level Select menu.

• Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of

the trigger level remains unchanged.

• Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the

trigger level remains unchanged.

• Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,

and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower

limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.

When setting the trigger level, first select a level type and then tap the "Trigger" icon

on the small screen, rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen

or drag the adjustment icon under the Level A and Level B menu item to adjust the

level of Source A and Source B. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The

current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger

type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

8.7.9 Window Trigger

Window trigger provides a high trigger level and a low trigger level. The instrument

triggers when the input signal passes through the high trigger level or the low trigger

level.

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Window" from the drop-down

list. Then set the parameters for Window trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.17 Window Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Edge Type

Selects the input signal edge (under the Slope menu) on which the oscilloscope

triggers.

• Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level is

higher than the preset high trigger level.

• Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level is

lower than the preset low trigger level.

• Either: triggers on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the voltage

level meets the preset trigger level.

Trigger Position

After selecting the window type, click Position to further specify the time point of

trigger by selecting the trigger position.

• Enter: triggers when the input signal enters the specified trigger level range.

• Exit: triggers when the input signal exits the specified trigger level range.

• Time: triggers when the accumulated hold time since the input signal entered

the specified trigger level range is equal to the window time. After you select

this type, click or tap the input field of Time to set it by using the pop-up

numeric keypad. The available range is from 8 ns to 10 s.

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Select the level adjustment type under the Level Select menu.

• Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of

the trigger level remains unchanged.

• Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the

trigger level remains unchanged.

• Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,

and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower

limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.

When setting the trigger level, first select a level type and then tap the "Trigger" icon

on the small screen, rotate the knob

at the upper-right part of the small screen

or drag the adjustment icon under the Level A and Level B menu item to adjust the

level of Source A and Source B. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The

current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger

type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

8.7.10 Delay Trigger

In Delay trigger, you need to set Source A and Source B. The oscilloscope triggers

when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges (Edge A and Edge B) of

Source A and Source B meets the preset time limit, as shown in the figure below.

Edge A and Edge B must be two neighboring edges.

Figure 8.18 Delay Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Delay" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for Delay trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

Figure 8.19 Delay Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Setting

• Source A:

Click or tap the drop-down button of SourceA to select CH1-CH4. For details,

refer to descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in

the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

100

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

• Edge A:

Click or tap the trigger edge type ("Rising" or "Falling") of Source A in Delay

trigger under the EdgeA menu.

• Source B:

Click or tap the drop-down button of SourceB to select CH1-CH4. For details,

refer to descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in

the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

• Edge B:

Click or tap the trigger edge type ("Rising" or "Falling") of Source B in Delay

trigger under the EdgeB menu.

Set the trigger condition

Sets the time limit condition of Delay trigger in the When menu.

• >: triggers when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges of Source

A and Source B is greater than the preset time lower limit. Click or tap the input

field of Lower to set the delay time lower limit in Delay trigger with the pop-up

numeric keypad.

• <: triggers when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges of Source

A and Source B is smaller than the preset time upper limit. Click or tap the input

field of Upper to set the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger with the pop-up

numeric keypad.

• < >: triggers when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges of

Source A and Source B is greater than the lower limit of the preset time and

smaller than the upper limit of the preset time. Click or tap the input field of

Upper to set the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger with the pop-up numeric

keypad. Click or tap the input field of Lower to set the delay time lower limit in

Delay trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad. The lower time limit must be

smaller than the upper time limit.

• > <: triggers when the time difference (∆T) between the specified edges of

Source A and Source B is smaller than the lower limit of the preset time or

greater than the upper limit of the preset time. Click or tap the input field of

Upper to set the delay time upper limit in Delay trigger with the pop-up numeric

keypad. Click or tap the input field of Lower to set the delay time lower limit in

Delay trigger with the pop-up numeric keypad. The lower time limit must be

smaller than the upper time limit.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

101

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

• Level A:

Click or tap the input field of Level A to input the level of Source A with the pop-

up numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen or drag the

adjustment icon under the Level A menu to adjust the level of Source A. For

details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is displayed

in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level B:

Click or tap the input field of Level B to input the level of Source B with the pop-

up numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen or drag the

adjustment icon under the Level B menu to adjust the level of Source B. For

details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is displayed

in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger

type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

8.7.11 Setup/Hold Trigger

In setup&hold trigger, you need to set the clock source and data source. The setup

time starts when the data signal passes the trigger level and ends at the coming of

the specified clock edge; the hold time starts at the coming of the specified clock

edge and ends when the data signal crosses the trigger level again, as shown in the

figure below. The oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time is smaller

than the preset time.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

102

Figure 8.20 Setup/Hold Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Setup/Hold" from the drop-

down list. Then set the parameters for Setup/Hold trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

103

Figure 8.21 Setup/Hold Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed at the top of the

screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

Clock Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of SCL to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

104

Edge Type

Selects the desired clock edge type under the Slope menu, and it can be set to

"Rising" or "Falling".

Data Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of SDA to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

Data Type

Selects the desired item under the Data Type menu to set the effective pattern of the

data signal. It can be set to H (high level) or L (low level).

Trigger Condition

Sets the Setup/Hold trigger condition in the When menu.

• Setup: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time is smaller than the

specified setup time. After selecting this type, click or tap the input field of

Setup to set the setup time with the pop-up numeric keypad.

• Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the hold time is smaller than the specified

hold time. After selecting this type, click or tap the input field of Hold to set the

hold time with the pop-up numeric keypad.

• Setup/Hold: the oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time smaller

than the specified time value. After selecting this type, click or tap the input field

of Setup and Hold respectively to set the setup and hold time with the pop-up

numeric keypad.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger

type. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Holdoff

and

Noise Rejection

Level Selection and Setting

• Level A

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger

level to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the input field of

Level A to input the level of Source A with the pop-

up numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

105

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen or drag the

adjustment icon under the Level A menu to adjust the level of the clock source.

For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is

displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level B

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger

level to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the input field of Level B to input the level of data source with the

pop-up numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen,

then rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen or drag the

adjustment icon under the Level B menu to adjust the level of data source. For

details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is displayed

in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.12 Nth Edge Trigger

Triggers on the Nth edge that appears after the specified idle time. For example, in

the waveform shown in the figure below, the instrument should trigger on the second

rising edge after the specified idle time (the time between two neighboring rising

edges), and the idle time should be within the range between P and M (P< Idle

Time<M). Wherein, M is the time between the first rising edge and its previous rising

edge; P is the maximum time between the rising edges that participate in counting.

Figure 8.22 Nth Edge Trigger

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "Nth Edge" from the drop-down

list. Then set the parameters for Nth Edge trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

106

Figure 8.23 Nth Edge Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

107

Edge Type

Select the input signal edge (under the Slope menu) on which the oscilloscope

triggers.

• Rising: triggers on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level

meets the specified trigger level.

• Falling: triggers on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level

meets the specified trigger level.

Idle Time

Click or tap the input field of Idle Time, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the idle time before the edge counting in Nth edge trigger.

Edge Count

Click or tap the input field of Edges, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

value of "N" in Nth edge trigger. The available range is from 1 to 65,535.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen or drag the adjustment icon under the Level menu to

adjust the trigger level. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current

trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.13 RS232 Trigger (Option)

RS232 bus is a serial communication mode used in data transmission between PCs or

between a PC and a terminal. In RS232 serial protocol, a character is transmitted as a

frame of data. The frame consists of 1 start bit, 5-8 data bits, 1 check bit, and 1-2 stop

bits. Its format is as shown in the figure below. DS70000 series oscilloscope triggers

when the start frame, error frame, check error, or the specified data of the RS232

signal is detected.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

108

Figure 8.24 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Protocol

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "RS232" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for RS232 trigger.

Figure 8.25 RS232 Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed at the top of the

screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will change based on the

trigger settings.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

109

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

Polarity

Selects the polarity of data transmission under the Polarity menu. It can be set to

"Positive" or "Negative" .

Trigger Condition

Sets the the desired trigger condition in the When menu.

• Start: triggers on the start frame position.

• Error: triggers when an error frame is detected.

• Check Error: triggers when a check error is detected.

• Data: triggers on the last bit of the preset data bits. Click or tap the input field of

Data, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the data of RS232 trigger.

Baud Rate

Sets the baud rate of data transmission (i.g. specifies a clock frequency). Click or tap

the drop-down button of Baud Rate, then select the preset baud rate from the drop-

down list. The available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150 bps,

300 bps, and etc.

Data Bits

Indicate the number of bits per frame. Click or tap the drop-down button of Data Bits

to select the desired data bits. The available data bits include "5 Bits", "6 Bits", "7 Bits",

and "8 Bits".

Stop Bit

Stop Bit: indicates when to stop outputting data. Selects the desired stop bit under

the Stop Bit menu. The available data bits include 1 Bit, 1.5 Bits, and 2 Bits.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

110

Parity

Used to check whether the data are properly transmitted. Selects None, Even, or Odd

under the Parity menu.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen to adjust the trigger level. You can also set the trigger

level with the pop-up numeric keypad. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.14 I2C Trigger (Option)

I2C is a 2-wire serial bus used to connect the microcontroller and its peripheral

device. It is a bus standard widely used in the microelectronic communication control

field.

The I2C serial bus consists of SCL and SDA. Its transmission rate is determined by SCL,

and its transmission data is determined by SDA, as shown in the figure below. The

instrument series triggers on the start condition, restart, stop, missing

acknowledgment, specific device address, or data value. Besides, it can also trigger on

the specific device address and data values at the same time.

Figure 8.26 Schematic Diagram of I2C Protocol

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

111

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "I2C" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for I2C trigger.

Figure 8.27 I2C Trigger Setting Menu

At this time, the current trigger setting information (including trigger type, trigger

source, and trigger level) is displayed at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure

below. The information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of SCL and SDA to select CH1-CH4 to the specify

the sources of SCL and SDA respectively. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

112

Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger information label at the

top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

Trigger Condition

Sets the the desired trigger condition in the When menu.

• Start: triggers when SDA data transitions from high level to low level while SCL

is high level.

• Stop: triggers when SDA data transitions from low level to high level while SCL is

high level.

• Restart: triggers when another start condition occurs before a stop condition.

• MissedAck: triggers when the SDA data is high level during any

acknowledgment of SCL clock position.

• Address: the trigger searches for the specified address value. When this event

occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the read/write bit. After this trigger

condition is selected:

- Click or tap the drop-down button of Direction to select "Write", "Read", or

"R/W".

This setting is not available when AddrBits is set to "8 Bits".

- Click or tap the drop-down button of AddrBits to select the desired

address bits. The available address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".

- Click or tap the input field of Address, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the address of I2C trigger.

• Data: the trigger searches for the specified data value on the data line (SDA).

When this event occurs, the oscilloscope will trigger on the clock line (SCL)

transition edge of the last bit of data. After this trigger condition is selected, you

can set the length of bytes, the address width, and data.

- Click or tap the input field of Bytes, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 5.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of AddrBits to select the desired

address bits. The available address bits are "7 Bits", "8 Bits", and "10 Bits".

- Click or tap the input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is will

displayed. As shown in the figure below, you can select "Bin" or "Hex"

format to set the data format.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

113

Figure 8.28 Bin Format Setting

Figure 8.29 Hex Format Setting

• A&D: the oscilloscope searches for the specified address and data at the same

time, then triggers when both the address and data meet the conditions. After

this condition is selected, you need to set the sub-menu items such as

Direction,

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

114

Bytes, AddrBits, Address, and Data. For the setting methods, refer to

descriptions in "Address" and "Data" conditions.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

Level Selection and Setting

• Level A

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger

level to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the input field of Level A to input the level of SCL with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen to adjust the

level of SCL. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger

level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level B

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger

level to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the input field of Level B to input the level of SDA with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen to adjust the

level of SDA. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger

level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.15 SPI Trigger (Option)

In SPI trigger, after the CS or timeout condition is satisfied, the oscilloscope triggers

when the specified data is found. When using SPI trigger, you need to specify the CLK

clock sources and MISO data sources.

Below is the sequential chart of SPI bus.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

115

Figure 8.30 Sequential Chart of SPI Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "SPI" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for SPI trigger.

Figure 8.31 SPI Trigger Setting Menu

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

116

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of CLK and MISO to select CH1-CH4 to the specify

the sources of CLK and MISO respectively. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger information label at the

top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

Selects the desired clock edge type under Slope.

• Rising: samples the MISO data on the rising edge of the clock.

• Falling: samples the MISO data on the falling edge of the clock.

Trigger Condition

Selects the desired trigger condition under When.

• With CS: if the CS signal is valid, the oscilloscope will trigger when the data

(SDA) satisfying the trigger conditions is found.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of CS to select CH1-CH4 as the CS signal

line.

- After selecting this condition, you can click or tap "Positive" (high level is

valid) or "Negative" (low level is valid) under CS Mode.

• Timeout: the oscilloscope starts to search for the data (MISO) on which to

trigger after the clock signal (CLK) stays in the idle state for a specified period of

time. After selecting this condition, you can click or tap Timeout, then use the

numeric keypad to set the idle time. The range is from 8 ns to 10 s.

Data

Click or tap the of field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is will displayed. You

can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

117

Data Bits

Click or tap the input field of DataBits, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the number of bits in the serial data string. The number of bits in the string can be

set to any integer ranging from 4 to 32.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

Level Selection and Setting

• Level A:

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger

level to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the input field of Level A to input the level of CLK with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen to adjust the

level of CLK. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger

level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level B:

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger

level to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the input field of Level B to input the level of MISO with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen to adjust the

level of MISO. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current

trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level C:

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger

level to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Click or tap the input field of

Level C to input the level of CS with the pop-up

numeric keypad. You can also tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen to adjust the

level of CS. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger

level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

118

8.7.16 CAN Trigger (Option)

DS70000 can trigger on the start of a frame, end of a frame, frame of the specified

type (e.g. Remote, Overload, Data, etc.), or error frame of the specified type (e.g.

Answer Error, Check Error, Format Error, etc.) of the CAN signal.

The data frame format of the CAN bus is as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8.32 Data Frame Format of the CAN Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "CAN" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for CAN trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

119

Figure 8.33 CAN Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

120

Signal Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Signal Type to select the desired signal type.

• CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.

• CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.

• TX/RX: indicates the Transmit signal and Receive signal from the CAN bus

transceiver.

• DIFF: indicates the CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog channel

by using a differential probe. Connect the probe's positive lead to the CAN_H

bus signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus signal.

Baud Rate

Set the baud rate of the signal. Click or tap the drop-down button of Baud to select

the preset baud rate from the drop-down list. The available baud rates include 10

kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps, 50 kbps, 62.5 kbps, 83.3 kbps, and etc.

Sample Position

Sample position is a point within a bit's time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at

this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from the

start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8.34 Sample Position

Click or tap the input field of Sample Position to set it by using the pop-up numeric

keypad. The settable range is from 10% to 90%.

Trigger Condition

Click or tap the drop-down button of When to select the desired trigger condition.

• SOF: triggers at the start of a frame.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

121

• EOF: triggers at the end of a frame.

• Remote ID: triggers on the specified ID of Remote frame. When you select

Remote ID, you need to set the following parameters.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Extended ID menu to enable or disable

the extended ID.

- Click or tap the input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• Overload: triggers on the overload frames.

• Frame ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID. When you select

Frame ID, you need to set the following parameters.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Extended ID menu to enable or disable

the extended ID.

- Click or tap the input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• Frame Data: triggers on the data frames with the specified Data. When you

select Frame Data, you need to set the following parameters.

Click or tap the input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is displayed.

You can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For details, refer to

descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• Data & ID: triggers on the data frames with the specified ID and data. When you

select Data & ID, click or tap to select "Data" or "ID" under the Define menu.

When you select "Data", click or tap the input field of Data, and then the

"Format" interface is displayed. You can set the data bit that needs to be

operated on. For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

. When you

select "ID", you need to set the following parameters.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Extended ID menu to enable or disable

the extended ID.

- Click or tap the input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• Frame Error: triggers on the error frame.

• Bit Fill: triggers on the error frame with the bit fill.

• Answer Error: triggers on the answer error frame.

• Check Error: triggers on the check error frame.

• Format Error: triggers on the format error frame.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

122

• Random Error: triggers on the random error frame, such as the format error

frame, answer error frame, etc.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen to adjust the trigger level. You can also set the trigger

level with the pop-up numeric keypad. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.17 FlexRay Trigger (Option)

DS70000 can trigger on the specified frame, symbol, error, or position of the FlexRay

bus. FlexRay is a type of differential serial bus configured with three consecutive

segments (i.g. packet header, payload, and packet trailer). Its data transmission rate is

up to 10 Mb/s. Each frame contains a static segment and a dynamic segment, and

ends with the bus idle time.

Its format is as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8.35 Frame Format of FlexRay Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "FlexRay" from the drop-down

list. Then set the parameters for FlexRay trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

123

Figure 8.36 FlexRay Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

124

Baud Rate

Set the baud rate of the signal. Click or tap the drop-down button Baud to select a

FlexRay baud rate that matches the FlexRay bus signal. Select the preset baud rate

from the drop-down list. The available baud rates include 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, and 10

Mbps.

Trigger Condition

Click or tap the drop-down button of When to select the desired trigger condition.

• Post: triggers on the specified position of the FlexRay bus. Select Post as the

trigger condition, and then click or tap its drop-down button to select "TSS End",

"FSS_BSS End", "FES End", or "DTS End" from the drop-down list.

• Frame: triggers on the frame of FlexRay bus.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of Frame to select the frame type. The

types of frames include null, Syns, Start, and All.

- Select "ID" or "Cyc Count" under the Define menu.

When you select "Cyc Count", set the following parameters: Cyc Comp,

Count Min, and Count Max. Click or tap the drop-down button of Cyc

Comp to select the comparison conditions. The available choices include =,

≠, >, <, ><, and <>. When a certain condition is selected, click or tap the

input field of Count Min or Count Max, then set the number of cycles with

the pop-up numeric keypad.

When you select "ID", set the following parameters: ID Comp, ID Min, and

ID Max. Click or tap the drop-down button of ID Comp to select the

comparison conditions. The available choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, and

<>. When a certain condition is selected, click or tap the input field of ID

Max or ID Min, then use the numeric keypad to set the frame ID.

• Symbol: triggers on the CAS/MTS (Collision Avoidance Symbol/Media Access

Test Symbol) and WUP (Wakeup Pattern) of FlexRay bus.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of Symbol to select the symbol type.

The symbol type includes CAS/MTS and WUS.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of ID Comp to select the comparison

conditions. The available choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, and <>. When a

certain condition is selected, click or tap the input field of ID Max or ID

Min, then use the numeric keypad to set the frame ID.

• Error: triggers when an error occurs to the FlexRay bus. Click or tap the drop-

down button of Error to select the error type. It includes Head CRC Err, Tail CRC

Err, Decode Err, and Random Err.

As the occurrence possibility of specified FlaxRay frame is very low, it is

recommended that you set the oscilloscope to "Normal" trigger mode when the

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

125

trigger condition is set to "Frame", so as to prevent the instrument from triggering

automatically while waiting for the specified frame. The same goes for "Error" trigger

condition. In addition, when multiple FlexRay errors occur at the same time, you need

to adjust the trigger holdoff so as to view the specific error.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen to adjust the trigger level. You can also set the trigger

level with the pop-up numeric keypad. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.18 LIN Trigger (Option)

DS70000 can trigger on the sync field of LIN signal, and can also trigger on the

specified identifier, data, or frame.

The data frame format of the LIN bus is as shown in the figure below.

Figure 8.37 Data Frame Format of the LIN Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "LIN" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for LIN trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

126

Figure 8.38 LIN Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, then the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

127

Protocol Version

In the Version menu, select the protocol version that matches the signal under test.

The available versions include 1.X, 2.X and Both.

Baud Rate

Click or tap the drop-down button of the Baud menu to select the preset baud rate

from the drop-down list. The available baud rates include 1.2 kbps, 2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps,

9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, and etc.

Sample Position

Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level

at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from

the start of the bit to the sample position" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure

below.

Figure 8.39 Sample Position

Click or tap the input field of Sample Position to set it by using the pop-up numeric

keypad. The settable range is from 10% to 90%.

Trigger Condition

Click or tap the drop-down button of When to select the desired trigger condition.

• Sync: triggers on the last bit of the sync field.

• ID: triggers when the frames with the specified ID are found.

Click or tap the input field of ID, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

ID.

• Data: triggers when the data that meet the preset conditions are found.

- Click or tap the input field of Bytes, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

128

- Click or tap the input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• Data&ID: triggers when the frames with the specified ID and data that meet the

preset conditions are both found.

- Click or tap the input field of Bytes, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the length of the data. Its range is from 1 to 8.

- Click or tap the input field of ID, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad

to set ID.

- Click or tap the input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the data bit that needs to be operated on. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• Sleep: triggers when the sleep frame is found.

• Wakeup: triggers when the wakeup frame is found.

• Error: triggers on the specified type of error frame. Click or tap the drop-down

button of Error Type to select the error type: Sync, Even Odd, or Check Sum.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

Trigger Level

Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then rotate the knob at the upper-

right part of the small screen to adjust the trigger level. You can also set the trigger

level with the pop-up numeric keypad. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger

Level

. The current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top

of the screen.

8.7.19 I2S Trigger (Option)

In I2S trigger, the oscilloscope searches for the specified data value and take it as the

condition for identifying the trigger. You need to specify the serial clock line (SCLK, 1

pulse is found on the clock line once 1 bit of digital audio data is sent), frame clock

line (WS, used for switch the audio channel data), and serial data line (SDA, used for

transmit audio data represented in binary (2's complement)).

Below is the sequential chart of I2S bus.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

129

Figure 8.40 Sequential Chart of I2S Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "I2S" from the drop-down list.

Then set the parameters for I2S trigger.

Figure 8.41 I2S Trigger Setting Menu

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

130

After selecting the trigger type, then the current trigger setting information (including

trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger information

label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The information will

change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of SCLK, WS, and SDA to select CH1-CH4 to the

specify the sources of SCLK, WS, and SDA respectively. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

Edge Type

Selects the desired clock edge from the drop-down list of SCLK Edge.

• Rising: samples the SDA data on the rising edge of the clock.

• Falling: samples the SDA data on the falling edge of the clock.

Audio

Click or tap the drop-down button of Audio to select the audio channel ("Left",

"Right", or "Either").

Trigger Condition

Click or tap the drop-down button of When to select the desired trigger condition.

• =: triggers when the channel's data equal the set data value. Click or tap the

input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is displayed. You can set the

data bit that needs to be operated on. For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C

Trigger (Option)

• ≠: triggers when the channel's data do not equal the set data value. Click or tap

the input field of Data, and then the "Format" interface is displayed. You can set

the data bit that needs to be operated on. For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C

Trigger (Option)

• >: triggers when the channel's data are greater than the set data value. Click or

tap the input field of Data Min, and then the "Format" interface is displayed. You

can set the lower limit of the data bit. For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C

Trigger (Option)

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

131

• <: triggers on when the channel's data are smaller than the set data value. Click

or tap the input field of Data Max, and then the "Format" interface is displayed.

You can set the upper limit of the data bit. For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C

Trigger (Option)

• < >: triggers when the channel's data are smaller than the upper limit of the

data value and greater than the lower limit of the data value.. Click or tap the

input field of Data Max and Data Min, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the upper limit and lower limit of the data bit. For details,

refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• > <: triggers when the channel's data are greater than the upper limit of the

data value and smaller than the lower limit of the data value. Click or tap the

input field of Data Max and Data Min, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the upper limit and lower limit of the data bit. For details,

refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

User Width

Click or tap the input field of User Width to set it by using the pop-up numeric

keypad. Its range is from 4 to 32.

The user width is smaller than or equal to the width.

Width

Click or tap the input field of Width to set it by using the pop-up numeric keypad. Its

range is from 4 to 32.

Alignment

Click or tap the drop-down button of Alignment to select the alignment way for data

signal.

• I2S: MSB (Most Significant Bit) of data for each sample is sent first, and LSB

(Least Significant Bit) is sent last. The MSB appears on the SDA line one bit clock

after the edge of the WS transition.

• LJ: data transmission (MSB first) begins at the edge of the WS transition.

• RJ: data transmission (MSB first) is right-justified to the WS transition.

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

132

Trigger Level

• Level A

Sets the trigger level of SCLK. Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen to adjust the

trigger level. You can also set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric keypad.

For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is

displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level B

Sets the trigger level of WS. Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen to adjust the

trigger level. You can also set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric keypad.

For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is

displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

• Level C

Sets the trigger level of SDA. Tap the "Trigger" icon on the small screen, then

rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen to adjust the

trigger level. You can also set the trigger level with the pop-up numeric keypad.

For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The current trigger level is

displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the screen.

8.7.20 MIL-STD-1553 Trigger (Option)

1553B is the abbreviation for the MIL-STD-1553 bus. DS70000 can trigger on the sync

field of 1553B bus, and can also trigger on the specified data word, command word,

status word, or error type.

The command word, data word, and status word format of the 1553B bus is as shown

in the figure below.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

133

Figure 8.42 Formats of the Command Word, Data Word, and Status Word of the

1553B Bus

Trigger Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select "MIL-STD-1553" from the drop-

down list. Then set the parameters for MIL-STD-1553 trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

134

Figure 8.43 MIL-STD-1553 Trigger Setting Menu

After selecting the trigger type, and then the current trigger setting information

(including trigger type, trigger source, and trigger level) is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen, as shown in the figure below. The

information will change based on the trigger settings.

Source Selection

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select CH1-CH4. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Trigger Source

. The current trigger source is displayed in the trigger

information label at the top of the screen.

Only when we select the channel (that has been input with signals) as the trigger

source, can we obtain a stable trigger.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

135

Polarity

Selects the desired polarity.under the Polarity menu. The polarities available are

positive polarity ( ) and negative polarity ( ).

Level Selection and Setting

After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level

to correctly trigger the signal and obtain a stable waveform.

Select the level adjustment type under the Level Select menu.

• Level A: only adjusts the upper limit of the trigger level, and the lower limit of

the trigger level remains unchanged.

• Level B: only adjusts the lower limit of the trigger level, and the upper limit of the

trigger level remains unchanged.

• Level AB: adjusts the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time,

and the trigger level deviation (the difference between the upper limit and lower

limit of the trigger level) remains unchanged.

In MIL-STD-1553 trigger, pressing down the trigger level knob at the upper-right part

of the small screen can quickly switch the current level adjustment type.

When setting the trigger level, first select a level type and then tap the "Trigger" icon

on the small screen, rotate the knob at the upper-right part of the small screen

or drag the adjustment icon under the Level A and Level B menu item to adjust the

level of Source A and Source B. For details, refer to descriptions in

Trigger Level

. The

current trigger level is displayed in the trigger information label at the top of the

screen.

Trigger Condition

Click or tap the drop-down button of When to select the desired trigger condition.

• Sync: triggers on the specified sync type. After this trigger condition is selected,

click or tap the drop-down button of Sync to select the desired sync type: Data

Sync, Cmd/Status Sync, or All Sync.

• Data: triggers on the specified data word. After this trigger condition is selected,

click or tap the comparison conditions from the

Comp menu. The available

choices include =, ≠, >, <, ><, and <>.

- =: triggers when the channel's data word equals the set data word. Click or

tap the input field of Min, and then the "Format" interface is displayed. You

can set the lower limit of the data word. For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

- ≠: triggers when the channel's data word does not equal the set data word.

Click or tap the input field of

Min, and then the "Format" interface is

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

136

displayed. You can set the lower limit of the data word. For details, refer to

descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

- >: triggers when the channel's data word is greater than the set data word.

Click or tap the input field of Min, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the lower limit of the data word. For details, refer to

descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

- <: triggers when the channel's data word is smaller than the set data word.

Click or tap the input field of Max, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the upper limit of the data word. For details, refer to

descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

- < >: triggers when the channel's data word is smaller than the upper limit

of the data word and greater than the lower limit of the data word. Click or

tap the input field of Max and Min, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the upper limit and lower limit of the data word. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

- > <: triggers when the channel's data word is greater than the upper limit

of the data word and smaller than the lower limit of the data word. Click or

tap the input field of Max and Min, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the upper limit and lower limit of the data word. For

details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• RTA: triggers on the specified remote terminal address. After this trigger

condition is selected, click or tap the input field of RTA, and then the "Format"

interface is displayed. You can set the remote terminal address. For details, refer

to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• RTA+11Bit: triggers on the RTA and the remaining 11 bits.

After this trigger condition is selected:

- Click or tap the input field of RTA, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the remote terminal address. For details, refer to

descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

- Click or tap the input field of Bit time, and then the "Format" interface is

displayed. You can set the bit time position value to 0 (low), 1 (high), or X

(don't care). For details, refer to descriptions in

I2C Trigger (Option)

• Error: triggers on the specified error type. After this trigger condition is selected,

click or tap the drop-down button of Err Type to select the error type.

- Sync Error: triggers when an invalid sync pulse is found.

- Check Error: triggers when the parity bit is incorrect for the data in the

word.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

137

Trigger Mode

In Sweep menu, select Auto, Normal, or Single as the trigger mode. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Trigger Mode

Trigger Parameter Setting

Sets the trigger parameter (noise rejection) under this trigger type. For details, refer

to descriptions in

Noise Reject

8.8 Trigger Output Connector

The trigger output connector ([AUX OUT]) on the rear panel of DS70000 series can

output trigger signals (trigger hardware) determined by the current setting.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen,

and then select "Utility" to enter the utility function menu. Click or tap Setup, and

then in the Aux Out menu, select "TrigOut". You can also tap the Utility icon on the

small screen to enter the utility function menu. A signal which reflects the current

oscilloscope capture rate can be output from [AUX OUT] connector each time a

trigger is generated by the oscilloscope. If this signal is connected to a waveform

display device to measure the frequency, the measurement result is the same as the

current capture rate.

If "PassFail" is selected for the Aux Out menu, the instrument can output a pulse from

the [AUX OUT] connector when a pass/failed event is detected during the pass/fail

test.

To Trigger the Oscilloscope

DS70000 User Guide

138

9 Math Operation

This series of oscilloscopes can realize multiple math operations between waveforms

of different channels, including arithmetic operation, spectrum operation, logic

operation, function operation, and digital filter. To enter the Math menu, perform any

of the following operations:

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select Math to enter the “Math” menu.

• Click or tap the Math1 ~ Math4 label at the bottom of the screen, and the

corresponding interface appears on the screen, as shown in

Figure 9.2

. Click or

tap the label again, or the icon

at the upper-right corner of the window to

enter the math operation menu.

• Tap the Math icon on the small screen at the right side of the device to enter the

math operation menu.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

139

Figure 9.1 Math Operation Menu

This oscilloscope provides four math operations: Math1, Math2, Math3, and Math4.

Users can select the math operation type by clicking or tapping the Math1 ~ Math4

label or by sliding the menu left and right to select the desired Math menu item. This

manual section takes Math1 as an example to introduce math operation.

In the Math menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Operation menu to show or

hide the waveform display window of the operation results. By default, it is OFF. When

set to ON, the figure as shown in

Figure 9.2

is displayed on the screen.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

140

Figure 9.2 Waveform Display Window of the Operation Results

Users can drag the window or click/tap the close button at the upper-right corner

of the window to close it, if needed.

9.1 Arithmetic Operation

In the Math menu, click or tap Operator to select the desired math operation. The

arithmetic operations supported by this oscilloscope include A+B, A-B, A×B, and A÷B.

• A+B: adds the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point

and displays the results.

• A-B: subtracts the waveform voltage values of signal source B from that of

source A point by point and displays the results.

• A×B: multiplies the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by

point and displays the results.

• A÷B: divides the waveform voltage values of signal source A by that of source B

point by point and displays the results. It can be used to analyze the Multiple

relation of the two channels waveforms.

Tip

When the voltage of signal source B is 0 V, the division result is treated as 0.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

141

Figure 9.3 Arithmetic Operation Menu

Operation Result Display Window

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Operation menu to enable or disable the display

of the arithmetic operation result window. The source and the vertical scale

parameters are displayed at the top of the window, as shown in the figure below.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

142

Figure 9.4 Operation Result Display Window

Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of SourceA or SourceB to select CH1, CH2, CH3,

or CH4. When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

Scale

Scale is used to set the vertical scale of the operation result. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical Scale

Offset

Offset is used to set the vertical offset of the operation result. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical Offset

Invert

Invert is used to enable or disable the inverted display function of the waveform. For

setting methods, refer to descriptions in

Waveform Invert

WaveForm

This oscilloscope supports Main and Zoom. By default, it is Main.

• MAIN: indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base

region.

• ZOOM: indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

143

When you select "Zoom", you need to enable

Delayed Sweep

To Set the Horizontal

System

Expand

The oscilloscope supports two vertical expansion modes: GND and Center. By default,

it is "GND".

• GND: when the vertical scale is changed, the math operation waveform will be

expanded or compressed around the signal ground level position.

• Center: when the vertical scale is changed, the math operation waveform will be

expanded or compressed around the screen center.

Auto Set

Click or tap AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the operation

results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so as to better to

observe.

Label

Label is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

Channel Label

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

9.2 Function Operation

In the Math menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Operator to select the

desired function operation. The available function operation types of this oscilloscope

include Intg, Diff, Sqrt, Lg (Base 10 Exponential), Ln, Exp, Abs, and AX+B.

• Intg: calculates the integral of the selected source. For example, you can use

integral to measure the area under a waveform or the pulse energy.

• Diff: calculates the discrete time derivative of the selected source. For example,

you can use differentiate to measure the instantaneous slope of a waveform.

• Sqrt: calculates the square roots of the selected source point by point and

displays the results.

• Lg (Base 10 Exponential): calculates the base 10 exponential of the selected

source point by point and displays the results.

• Ln: calculates the natural logarithm (Ln) of the selected source point by point

and displays the results.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

144

• Exp: calculates the exponential of the selected source point by point and

displays the results.

• Abs: calculates the absolute value of the selected source and displays the results.

• AX+B: applies a linear function to the selected source, and displays the results.

Figure 9.5 Function Operation Menu

Operation Result Display Window

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Operation menu to enable or disable the display

of the operation result window. The source and the vertical scale parameters are

displayed at the top of the window, as shown in the figure below.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

145

Figure 9.6 Operation Result Display Window

Source

Click the drop-down button for the Source menu to select the source as CH1, CH2,

CH3, and CH4. When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

Auto Set

Click or tap AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the operation

results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so as to better to

observe.

Scale

Scale is used to set the vertical scale of the operation result. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical Scale

Offset

Offset is used to set the vertical offset of the operation result. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical Offset

Invert

Invert is used to enable or disable the inverted display function of the waveform. For

setting methods, refer to descriptions in

Waveform Invert

WaveForm

This oscilloscope supports Main and Zoom. By default, it is Main.

• MAIN: indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base

region.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

146

• ZOOM: indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

When you select "Zoom", you need to enable

Delayed Sweep

To Set the Horizontal

System

Label

Label is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

Channel Label

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

Parameter Setting

• When the operator is "Intg", click or tap the input field for the Offset menu item

and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the DC offset calibration factor of the

input signal.

• When the operator is "Diff", click or tap the input field for the Smooth menu

item and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the number of smooth times for

the differential operation.

9.3 FFT Operation

FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is used to transform time-domain signals to frequency-

domain components (frequency spectrum). This oscilloscope provides FFT operation

function which enables you to observe the time-domain waveform and spectrum of

the signal at the same time. FFT operation can facilitate the following works:

• Measure harmonic components and distortion in the system;

• Display the characteristics of the noise in DC power;

• Analyze vibration.

In the Math menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Operator to select FFT to go

to the menu shown in

Figure 9.7

. Then configure the parameters of FFT.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

147

Figure 9.7 FFT Operation Menu

Operation

Click or tap the on/off tab for the Operation menu to enable or disable the FFT

operation result window. The parameters such as center frequency, frequency range,

and resolution are displayed at the top of the window, as shown in the figure below.

Of which, FFT resolution is the quotient of the sample rate and the number of FFT

points. If the number of FFT points is a fixed value (65535 at most), then the lower the

sample rate, the higher the resolution.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

148

Figure 9.8 FFT Operation Window

Source

Click or tap the drop-down button for the Source to select CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 as

the source. When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

Auto Set

Click or tap AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the operation

results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so as to better to

observe.

Frequency Range

In the X menu, select "Span-Center" (frequency range to center frequency) or "Start-

End" (start frequency to stop frequency) as a frequency range mode.

• Span-Center (frequency range to center frequency): the frequency range

refers to the screen width, and you can divide the frequency range by 10 to

obtain the frequency per division.

Click or tap the input field of Center to set the frequency of the frequency-

domain waveform relative to the horizontal center of the screen. Its range is

from 5 Hz to 5 GHz. By default, it is 5 MHz. Click or tap the input field of Span to

set the frequency range of the frequency-domain waveform. Its range is from 10

Hz to 5 GHz. By default, it is 10 MHz.

• Start-End: Start frequency refers to the frequency shown at the left side of the

screen. Click or tap the input field of

Start to set the start frequency of the

frequency-domain waveform. Its range is from 0 Hz to (stop frequency - 10 Hz).

By default it is 0 Hz. Stop frequency refers to the frequency shown at the right

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

149

side of the screen. Click or tap the input field of End to set the stop frequency of

the frequency-domain waveform. Its range is from (start frequency + 10 Hz) to 5

GHz. By default, it is 10 MHz.

Vertical Scale/Offset

Selects dBm/dBV or Vrms as the unit for Scale and Offset.

For setting methods of Scale, refer to the descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical Scale

For setting methods of Offset, refer to the descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical

Offset

Window Function

Spectral leakage can be considerably decreased when a window function is used. The

oscilloscope provides 6 FFT window functions which have different characteristics and

are applicable to measure different waveforms. You need to select the window

function according to the characteristics of the waveform to be measured. Click or tap

the drop-down button of Window to select the desired window function.

Table 9.1 Window Function

Window

Function

Characteristics

Waveforms Applicable to the

Window Function

Rectangular

Best frequency resolution

Poorest amplitude resolution

Similar to the situation when no

window is applied.

Transient or short pulse, the

signal levels before and after the

multiplication are basically the

same

Sine waveforms with the same

amplitudes and rather similar

frequencies

Wide band random noise with

relatively slow change of

waveform spectrum

Blackman-

Harris

Best amplitude resolution

Poorest frequency resolution

Single frequency signal,

searching for higher order

harmonics

Hanning

Better frequency resolution and

poorer amplitude resolution

compared with Rectangular

Sine, periodic, and narrow band

random noise

Hamming

A little bit better frequency

resolution than Hanning

Transient or short pulse, the

signal levels before and after the

multiplication are rather different

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

150

Window

Function

Characteristics

Waveforms Applicable to the

Window Function

Flattop Measure the signals accurately

Measure the signal that has no

accurate reference and requires

an accurate measurement

Triangle Better frequency resolution

Measure the narrow band signal

and that has strong noise

interference

Color Grade

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Color Grade item to enable/disable the color

grade display of FFT operation results. When enabled, different colors are displayed

on the screen to indicate the times of data acquisition or acquisition probability. Click

or tap the Reset button for the Color Grade menu to clear the color grade display and

display the color grade again.

Peak Search

Click or tap the icon

at the right side of Peak Search to enter the peak search

menu, as shown in the figure below.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

151

Figure 9.9 Peak Search

• Peak Search ON/OFF: click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Peak Search menu

to enable or disable the display of the peak search window. By default, it is OFF.

• Peak Number: click or tap the input field for the Peak Number menu item and

use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the number of peaks. Its range is from 1

to 15. Its default value is 5.

• Threshold: click or tap the input field for the Threshold menu item to set the

threshold of the peak with the pop-up numeric keypad. The range of the

threshold is related to the current FFT scale and offset.

• Excursion: click or tap the input field for the Excursion menu item to set the

excursion of the peak. The min. value of Excursion is 0 and its unit is dB.

• Table Order: click o tap to select Amp Order or Freq Order as the sorting mode

under the Table Order menu. By default, it is "Amp Order".

Click or tap Export, then the save setting interface is displayed. You can export the

peak search results to the internal memory or the external USB storage device in CSV

format. For detailed saving operation, refer to

To Save a File

and

Disk Management

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

152

Clicking or tapping the icon at the right side of Peak Search can close the the

peak search menu.

9.4 Logic Operation

In the Math menu, click or tap Operator to select the desired math operation. The

logic operation supported by this oscilloscope include A&&B, A||B, A^B, and !A. After

selecting the desired logic operation from the drop-down list of Operator, you can

configure its settings for the selected logic operation type.

Figure 9.10 Logic Operation Menu

• A&&B: Performs logic "AND" operation on the waveform voltage values of the

specified sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the

voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the

corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The

results of logic AND operation of two binary bits are shown in

Table 9.2 Logic

Operation

• A||B: Performs logic "OR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the

specified sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

153

voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the

corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The

results of logic OR operation of two binary bits are shown in

Table 9.2 Logic

Operation

• A^B: Performs logic "XOR" operation on the waveform voltage values of the

specified sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the

voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the

corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The

results of logic XOR operation of two binary bits are shown in

Table 9.2 Logic

Operation

• !A: Performs logic "NOT" operation on the waveform voltage values of the

specified sources point by point and displays the results. In operation, when the

voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the

corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic "1"; otherwise it is logic "0". The

results of logic "NOT" operation of one binary bit are shown in

Table 9.2 Logic

Operation

Table 9.2 Logic Operation

A B A&&B A||B A^B !A

0 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 1 1

1 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0 0

Operation Result Display Window

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Operation menu to enable or disable the display

of the operation result window. The source and the waveform sizes parameters are

displayed at the top of the window, as shown in the figure below.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

154

Figure 9.11 Operation Result Display Window

Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of SourceA or SourceB to select CH1, CH2, CH3,

or CH4. When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

Wave Size

Click or tap to select "Small", "Medium", or "Large" as the the waveform display

mode.

Offset

Offset is used to set the vertical offset of the operation result. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical Offset

Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the digital signal converted from the analog signal on the

source. Click or tap the input field of this menu to set the sensitivity with the pop-up

numeric keypad. For detailed operations, refer to the descriptions in

Parameter

Setting Method

WaveForm

This oscilloscope supports Main and Zoom. By default, it is Main.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

155

• MAIN: indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base

region.

• ZOOM: indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

When you select "Zoom", you need to enable

Delayed Sweep

To Set the Horizontal

System

Threshold

Click or tap the input field for the threshold menu of the specified channel and use

the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold. For detailed operations, refer to the

descriptions in

Parameter Setting Method

Label

Label is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

Channel Label

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

9.5 Digital Filter

In the Math menu, click or tap Operator to select the desired math operation. The

digital filter supported by this oscilloscope includes: low-pass filter, high-pass filter,

band-pass filter, and band-stop filter.

• LowPass: only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current

upper limit frequency to pass.

• HighPass: only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current

lower limit frequency to pass.

• BandPass: only allows the signals whose frequencies are higher than the current

lower limit frequency and lower than the current upper limit frequency to pass.

• BandStop: only allows the signals whose frequencies are lower than the current

lower limit frequency or higher than the current upper limit frequency to pass.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

156

Figure 9.12 Digital Filter Menu

Operation Result Display Window

Click or tap the on/off tab for the Operation menu to enable or disable the display of

the operation result window. The source and the vertical scale parameters are

displayed at the top of the window, as shown in the figure below.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

157

Figure 9.13 Operation Result Display Window

Source

Click or tap the drop-down button for the Source to select CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 as

the source. When a source channel is selected, the selected channel automatically

switches to the ON state.

Auto Set

Click or tap AutoSetting to adjust the vertical scale and the offset of the operation

results to the optimal value according to the current configuration, so as to better to

observe.

Scale

Scale is used to set the vertical scale of the operation result. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical Scale

Offset

Offset is used to set the vertical offset of the operation result. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

To Adjust the Vertical Offset

Invert

Invert is used to enable or disable the inverted display function of the waveform. For

setting methods, refer to descriptions in

Waveform Invert

WaveForm

This oscilloscope supports Main and Zoom. By default, it is Main.

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

158

• MAIN: indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base

region.

• ZOOM: indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

When you select "Zoom", you need to enable

Delayed Sweep

To Set the Horizontal

System

Frequency Limit

• LowPass: click or tap the input field for the ωc menu item and use the pop-up

numeric keypad to set the upper limit frequency.

• HighPass: click or tap the input field for the ωc menu item and use the pop-up

numeric keypad to set the lower limit frequency.

• BandPass: click or tap the input field for the ωc1 menu item and use the pop-up

numeric keypad to set the lower limit frequency. Click or tap the input field for

the ωc2 menu item and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the upper limit

frequency.

• BandStop: click or tap the input field for the ωc1 menu item and use the pop-

up numeric keypad to set the lower limit frequency. Click or tap the input field

for the ωc2 menu item and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the upper

limit frequency.

The settable ranges of the upper and lower limit frequencies are related to the Math

sample rate (displayed at the bottom of the screen when the Math function is

enabled). The sample rate of the analog channel or the changes of the memory depth

can affect the Math sample rate.

Label

Label is used to set the label for the math operation results. For setting methods,

refer to descriptions in

Channel Label

Grid

For setting methods, refer to the descriptions in

To Set the Screen Grid

Math Operation

DS70000 User Guide

159

10 Measure

To enter the Measure menu, perform any of the following operations:

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select Measure to enter the “Measure” menu.

• Tap the Measure icon on the small screen at the right side of the screen to enter

the “Measure” menu.

• Click or tap the Measure icon at the upper right part of the screen enter the

“Measure” menu.

• In

To Set the Vertical System

menu, click or tap the Measure button to enter the

measurement setting menu.

10.1 Measurement Parameter

This oscilloscope allows you to set the measurement source, enable or disable the all

measurement function, the statistical function, and etc. You can make quick

measurements for many waveform parameters. The measurement results will be

displayed at the right section of the screen under the Result list.

Tip

If there is no signal input for the current source or the measurement result is not within the

valid range (too large or too small), then the measurement results are invalid, and "*****" is

displayed on the screen. Please re-input the signal or set the signal.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

160

10.1.1 Time Parameters

Figure 10.1 Time Parameters

• Period: defined as the time between the middle threshold points of two

consecutive, like-polarity edges.

• Frequency: defined as the reciprocal of period.

• Rise Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold

lower limit to the threshold upper limit.

• Fall Time: indicates the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold

upper limit to the threshold lower limit.

• +Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a rising edge

to the threshold middle value of the next falling edge.

• -Width: indicates the time between the threshold middle value of a falling edge

to the threshold middle value of the next rising edge.

• +Duty:indicates the ratio of the positive pulse width to the period.

• -Duty:indicates the ratio of the negative pulse width to the period.

• Tvmax: indicates the time that corresponds to the maximum value of the

waveform (Vmax).

• Tvmin: indicates the time that corresponds to the minimum value of the

waveform (Vmin).

The default values for threshold upper limit, threshold middle value, and threshold

low limit are 90%, 50%, and 10%, respectively.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

161

10.1.2 Count Values

The default values for threshold upper limit and threshold low limit are 90% and 10%,

respectively.

Positive Pulse Count

The number of positive pulses that rise from under the threshold lower limit to above

the threshold upper limit.

Negative Pulse Count

The number of negative pulses that fall from above the threshold upper limit to

below the threshold lower limit.

Rising Edge Count

The number of rising edges that rise from under the threshold lower limit to above

the threshold upper limit.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

162

Falling Edge Count

The number of falling edges that fall from above the threshold upper limit to below

the threshold lower limit.

10.1.3 Delay and Phase Parameters

Figure 10.2 Delay and Phase Parameters

1 Delay(r-r): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values of

the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay indicates that the

rising edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

163

2 Delay(f-f): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values of

the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. Negative delay indicates that the

falling edge of Source A occurred after that of Source B.

3 Delay(r-f): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values of

the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B. Negative delay

indicates that the rising edge of Source A occurred after the falling edge of Source

4 Delay(f-r): indicates the time difference between the threshold middle values of

the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. Negative delay

indicates that the falling edge of Source A occurred after the rising edge of Source

5 Phase(r-r): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle values of

the rising edge of Source A and that of Source B. The phase formula is as follows:

Wherein,

PhaseA

represents Phase(r-r),

DelayA

represents Delay(r-r), and

Period

sourceA

represents period of Source A.

6 Phase(f-f): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle values of

the falling edge of Source A and that of Source B. The phase formula is as follows:

Wherein,

PhaseA

represents Phase(r-r),

DelayA

represents Delay(r-r), and

Period

sourceA

represents period of Source A.

7 Phase(r-f): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle values of

the rising edge of Source A and the falling edge of Source B. The phase formula is

as follows:

Wherein,

PhaseA

represents Phase(r-r),

DelayA

represents Delay(r-r), and

Period

sourceA

represents period of Source A.

8 Phase(f-f): indicates the phase deviation between the threshold middle values of

the falling edge of Source A and the rising edge of Source B. The phase formula is

as follows:

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

164

Wherein,

PhaseA

represents Phase(r-r),

DelayA

represents Delay(r-r), and

Period

sourceA

represents period of Source A.

Tip

• Source A and Source B can be any channel among CH1~ CH4 and Math1~ Math4.

• The default threshold middle value is 50%.

10.1.4 Voltage Parameters

Figure 10.3 Voltage Parameters

1 Vmax: indicates the voltage value from the highest point of the waveform to the

GND.

2 Vmin: indicates the voltage value from the lowest point of the waveform to the

GND.

3 Vpp: the voltage value from the highest point to the lowest point of the waveform.

4 Vtop: indicates the voltage value from the flat top of the waveform to the GND.

5 Vbase: indicates the voltage value from the flat base of the waveform to the GND.

6 Vamp: indicates the voltage value from the top of the waveform to the base of the

waveform.

7 Vupper: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold

maximum value.

8 Vmid: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold middle

value.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

165

9 Vlower: indicates the actual voltage value that corresponds to the threshold

minimum value.

10 Vavg: indicates the arithmetic average value on the whole waveform or in the

gating area. The formula is shown as follows:

Wherein,

is the measurement result of the

ith

point, and

is the number of

points being measured.

11 VRMS: indicates the root mean square value on the whole waveform or in the

gating area. The formula is as follows:

Wherein,

is the measurement result of the

ith

point, and

is the number of

points being measured.

12 Per.VRMS: indicates the root mean square value within a period. The formula is as

shown above.

13 Overshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the maximum value and

the top value of the waveform to the amplitude value.

14 Preshoot: indicates the ratio of the difference between the minimum value and

the base value of the waveform to the amplitude value.

15 AC RMS: indicates the root-mean-square value of the waveforms, with the DC

component removed. The formula is shown as follows:

Wherein,

is the amplitude of the

ith

point,

Average

is the waveform average

value, and

is the number of points being measured.

10.1.5 Other Parameters

• Positive Slew Rate: On the rising edge, first calculate the difference between the

high value and the low value, then use the difference to divide the

corresponding time value to obtain the positive slew rate.

• Negative Slew Rate: On the falling edge, first calculate the difference between

the low value and the high value, then use the difference to divide the

corresponding time value to obtain the negative slew rate.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

166

• Area: indicates the area of the whole waveform within the screen. The unit is V*s.

The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the vertical offset) is

positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero reference is negative. The

area measured is the algebraic sum of the area of the whole waveform within the

screen.

• Period Area: indicates the area of the first period of waveform on the screen.

The unit is V*s. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the

vertical offset) is positive, and the area of the waveform below the zero reference

is negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the whole period area.

10.2 To Select the Measurement Item

In the Measure menu, click or tap Horizontal, Vertical, or Other to go to the desired

menu. You can also slide to select the measurement item to enter the corresponding

interface. as shown in

Figure 10.4

Figure 10.5

, and

Figure 10.6

• Vertical: Vmax, Vmin, Vpp, Vtop, Vbase, Vamp, Vupper, Vmid, Vlower, Vavg,

VRMS, Per. VRMS, AC.RMS, Overshoot, Preshoot, Area, and Period Area.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

167

Figure 10.4 Vertical Measurement Items

• Horizontal: Period, Frequency, Rise Time, Fall Time, +Width, -Width, +Duty, -

Duty, Positive Pulse Count, Negative Pulse Count, Rising Edge Count, Falling

Edge Count, Tvmax, Tvmin, +Slew Rate, and -Slew Rate.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

168

Figure 10.5 Horizontal Measurement Items

• Other: Delay (r-r), Delay (r-f), Delay (f-r), Delay (f-f), Phase (r-r), Phase (r-f), Phase

(f-r), and Phase (f-f).

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

169

Figure 10.6 Other Measurement Items

10.3 Measurement Settings

In the Measure menu, click or tap the Setting button to enter the measurement

setting menu.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

170

Figure 10.7 Measurement Settings

Measurement Mode

Selects measurement mode: Normal or Precision.

• Normal: executes measurement of up to 1 Mpts.

• Precision: executes measurement of up to 200 Mpts, improving the resolution of

measurement results. In this mode, the refresh rate of the waveforms may be

reduced.

Indicator

In the Measure setting menu, click or tap On or Off for the Indicator menu item to

enable or disable the indicator.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

171

If enabled, one or multiple cursors will be displayed on the screen. Before enabling

the indicator, you need to at least enable one auto measurement parameter and the

number of cursors will change with the measurement parameter enabled.

Measurement Threshold

• First click or tap % or Abs as the display type.

• Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired channel

(CH1~CH4 or Math1~Math4).

• Click or tap the input field of Upper and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the upper limit of the measurement. When the upper limit is set to be smaller

than or equal to the current middle value, a prompt message "Set at lower limit"

is displayed. Then, the oscilloscope will automatically adjust the upper limit and

make it greater than the middle value. By default, it is 90%. The default absolute

value varies with the vertical setting of the channel.

• Click or tap the input field of Mid and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

middle value of the measurement. The middle value is limited by the settings of

the upper limit and lower limit. By default, it is 50%. The default absolute value

varies with the vertical setting of the channel.

• Click or tap the input field of Lower and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the lower limit of the measurement. When the lower limit is set to be greater

than or equal to the current middle value, a prompt message "Set at upper limit"

is displayed. Then, the oscilloscope will automatically adjust the lower limit and

make it smaller than the middle value. By default, it is 10%. The default absolute

value varies with the vertical setting of the channel.

• Click the Default button to return the upper, middle, and lower limits to their

default values.

Tip

Modifying the threshold will affect the measurement results of time, delay, and phase

parameters.

Measurement Range

Click or tap the drop-down button of the

Region menu or "Main" ".

• Main: indicates that the measurement range is within the main time base region.

• Zoom: indicates that the measurement range is within the zoomed time base

region.

Tip

Only when you enable the delayed sweep function first, can "Zoom" be enabled.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

172

Amplitude Measurement Method

Click or tap Auto or Manual as the amplitude measurement method, which affects

the measurement method for the top and base values. If you select "Manual", set the

following parameters:

• Under the Top menu item, select Histogram or Max-min as the top value

measurement method.

• Under the Base menu item, click or tap Histogram or Max-min as the base

value measurement method.

Tip

If you select "Manual" for the amplitude method, the measurement results of other parameters

may be affected.

“"Histogram" and "Max-Min" are the internal measurement algorithm for the oscilloscope.

The "Histogram" method here is different from the Histogram function of the oscilloscope.

Remove the Measurement Results

Refer to

Remove the Measurement Results

Statistics

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Statistic item to enable/disable the statistical

function. This oscilloscope can make a statistics and display the current values of the

multiple parameters, as shown in the figure below.

• Click or tap Reset Stat. to clear the history statistics data and makes statistics

again.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

173

• Click or tap the input field of Count and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the count value. Its range is from 2 to 100000. Its default value is 1000.

• Click or tap the icon at the lower-right corner of the measurement statistics

label to unfold the statistics result to display all the measurement statistics items.

Click or tap the icon

to fold the measurement statistics label.

10.4 Remove the Measurement Results

This oscilloscope allows you to delete the measurement results of the parameters.

• In the Setting menu, click or tap Remove to delete the currently selected

measurement item that you’ve added. Each time you click or tap this button,

only one item will be deleted. Each time when one measurement item is selected

to be removed, the item following the deleted one under the result list will be

moved up.

• Click or tap Remove All to delete all the displayed measurement items.

• Click or tap to select the measurement item and drag it to the right to delete it

quickly.

10.5 Auto Measurement

When the oscilloscope is correctly connected and has detected a valid input signal,

click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen to

select the Auto icon to enable the waveform auto setting function and open the auto

setting function menu.

• Click or tap the first icon, and then the single period of the signal is displayed

automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements for

the "period" and "frequency" of the currently displayed waveforms in a single

period. The measurement results are displayed at the right side of the screen

under the "Result" list.

• Click or tap the second icon, and then multiple periods of the signal are

displayed automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make

measurements for the "period" and "frequency" of the currently displayed

waveforms in a multiple periods. The measurement results are displayed at the

right side of the screen under the "Result" list.

• Click or tap the third icon, and then one rising edge of the signal is displayed

automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements for

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

174

the "rise time" of the currently displayed rising edge. The measurement results

are displayed at the right side of the screen under the "Result" list. By default, it

is intended for the fast edge signal.

• Click or tap the fourth icon, and then one falling edge of the signal is displayed

automatically on the screen. Meanwhile, the system will make measurements for

the "Fall time" of the currently displayed falling edge. The measurement results

are displayed at the right side of the screen under the "Result" list. By default, it

is intended for the fast edge signal.

• Click or tap the fifth icon to cancel the auto setting and recovers to the

parameter settings prior to pressing the Auto key.

• Click or tap the sixth icon to enter the Auto Config sub-menu under the Utility

menu.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Peak to Peak menu to enable or

disable the peak-peak priority setting. This function is intended for the

shifted signal. If there is a large deviation, you can view the signal waveform

in priority when you enable the function.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Live CH menu to enable or disable test

the enabled channel.

If you select "OFF", the system will test the 4 analog channels (CH1-CH4) in

sequence. If no signal is found on the channel, then the channel is disabled.

If a signal is found on the channel, adjust the channel to an optimal scale to

display the signal. If you select "ON", the system will only test the enabled

channels.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Overlay menu to enable or disable the

waveform overlay display function. If enabled, waveforms of different

channels will be displayed in the same position of the screen. If disabled,

waveforms of different channels will be displayed on the screen from top to

bottom in sequence.

- Click or tap ON/OFF tab for the Coupling menu to enable or disable the

coupling hold function. If enabled, after performing the auto measurement

operation, the settings for the channel coupling remain unchanged. If

disabled, then the channel coupling is, by default, set to "DC".

Tip

The waveform auto setting function requires that the frequency of the signal should be greater

than or equal to 35 Hz, the amplitude greater than or equal to 5 mV. If not meeting the

conditions, the waveform auto setting function may be invalid.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

175

10.6 Cursor Measurement

Cursor measurement can measure the X axis values (e.g Time) and Y axis values (e.g.

Voltage) of the selected waveform. Before making cursor measurement, connect the

signal to the oscilloscope to acquire stable display. All the parameters supported by

the "

Auto Measurement

" function can be measured with cursor measurement. The

cursor measurement function provides the following two cursors.

Figure 10.8 Cursor

• X Cursor

X cursor is a vertical solid/dotted line that is used to make horizontal

adjustments. It can be used to measure time (s) and frequency (Hz).

- Cursor A is a vertical solid line (

is displayed at the bottom of the screen),

and Cursor B is a vertical dotted line (

is displayed at the bottom of the

screen).

- In the XY cursor mode, X cursor is used to measure the waveform

amplitude of CH1.

• Y Cursor

Y cursor is a horizontal solid/dotted line that is used to make vertical

adjustments. It can be used to measure amplitude (the unit is the same as that of

the source channel amplitude).

- Cursor A is a horizontal solid line (

is displayed at the right section of

the screen), and Cursor B is a horizontal dotted line (

is displayed at the

right section of the screen).

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

176

- In the XY cursor mode, Y cursor is used to measure the waveform amplitude

of CH2.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen,

then select the Cursors icon. The Cursors measurement results will be displayed in

the "Result" list at the right section of the screen.

Figure 10.9 Cursor Measurement Result

• AX: indicates the X value at Cursor A.

• AY: indicates the Y value at Cursor A.

• BX: indicates the X value at Cursor B.

• BY: indicates the Y value at Cursor B.

• ∆X: indicates the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.

• ∆Y: indicates the vertical spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B.

• 1/∆X: indicates the reciprocal of the horizontal spacing between Cursor A and

Cursor B.

Click or tap the measurement result list, then select Remove or Setting.

• If you select

Remove, the current cursor measurement results will be cleared and

the instrument will make new measurements. The new measurement results will

be displayed at the right side of the screen under the "Result" list.

• Click or tap Setting. Then the "Cursors" interface is displayed. You can select the

cursor mode: Manual, Track, and XY.

10.6.1 Manual Mode

In the manual cursor mode, you can adjust the cursor manually to measure the value

of the waveforms of the specified source at the current cursor. If the settings for the

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

177

parameter such as the cursor type and measurement source are different, the

measurement results will be different for cursor measurement.

In the Cursors menu, click or tap Manual for the Mode item to enable the Manual

cursor measurement function. The measurement results are displayed at the right

side of the screen under the "Result" list. When you change the cursor position, the

measurement results will be changed accordingly.

Figure 10.10 Manual Mode Setting Menu

Select Measurement Source

Click or tap the drop- of down button of Source to select the desired channel (None,

CH1~CH4, or Math1~Math4).

If the specified channel is selected as the source, the channel will be enabled

automatically.

Select Cursor Type

Click or tap "X" or "Y" under Select to select the cursor type.

• X: It is a pair of vertical solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for

measuring time parameters. The measurement results include AX, BX, △X, and

1/△X.

• Y: It is a pair of horizontal solid (Cursor A)/dotted (Cursor B) lines, used for

measuring voltage parameters. The measurement results include AY, BY, and ∆Y.

Adjust Cursor Position

1 When "X" is selected under Select, you can adjust the position of X cursor.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

178

- Click or tap the input field of AX and use the pop-up numeric keypad set the

horizontal position of Cursor A (X cursor). The horizontal axis indicates time,

and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the horizontal unit. Its

adjustable range is limited within the screen.

- Click or tap the input field of BX and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the horizontal position of Cursor B (X cursors). The horizontal axis indicates

time, and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the horizontal unit.

Its adjustable range is limited within the screen.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the AX BX menu item to adjust the horizontal

position of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) simultaneously. Its adjustable

range is limited within the screen. The horizontal spacing between Cursor A and

Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.

2 When "Y" is selected under Select, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of AY, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the vertical position of Cursor A (Y cursors). The vertical axis indicates

voltage, and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the vertical unit.

- Click or tap the input field of BY, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the vertical position of Cursor B (Y cursor). The vertical axis indicates

voltage, and the unit of its setting value is the same as that of the vertical unit.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the AY BY menu item to adjust the vertical

position of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) simultaneously. The vertical

spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) remains unchanged.

You can also use the multifunction knob at the right side of the front panel or

tap the screen to adjust the cursor.

Measurement Example

Measure the period of a sine wave by using the manual cursor measurement and

auto measurement respectively. The measurement results are both 1 ms .

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

179

Figure 10.11 Manual Cursor Measurement Example

Close the Cursor Measurement Result Window

Click or tap Remove to close the cursor measurement result display window at the

right side of the screen.

10.6.2 Track Mode

In the Track mode, you can adjust the two pairs of cursors (Cursor A and Cursor B) to

measure the X and Y values on two different sources respectively. When the cursors

are moved horizontally/vertically, the markers will position on the waveform

automatically. When the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally/vertically,

the markers will track the points being marked at the last adjustment of the cursors.

In the Cursors menu, click or tap Track for the Mode item to enable the Track cursor

measurement function. The measurement results are displayed at the right side of the

screen under the "Result" list.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

180

Figure 10.12 Track Mode Setting Menu

Select Measurement Source

• Click or tap the drop-down button of AX Source to select the desired channel

(None, CH1~CH4, or Math1~Math4).

• Click or tap the drop-down button of BX Source to select the desired channel

(None, CH1~CH4, or Math1~Math4).

If the specified channel is selected as the source, the channel will be enabled

automatically.

Select the Track Mode

Click or tap "X" or "Y" under the Track menu item as the current track axis. By default,

it is "X".

• X: tracks X Cursor and measures the value at X Cursor.

• Y: tracks Y Cursor and measures the time of the first point at the left side of the

screen.

Adjust Cursor Position

• When "X" is selected for the track mode, you can adjust the position of X cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of AX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the horizontal position of Cursor A (X cursor). Its adjustable range is limited

within the screen.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

181

- Click or tap the input field of BX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the horizontal position of Cursor B (X cursors). Its adjustable range is

limited within the screen.

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the AX BX menu item to adjust the

horizontal position of Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) simultaneously. Its

adjustable range is limited within the screen. The horizontal spacing

between Cursor A and Cursor B (X cursors) remains unchanged.

• When "Y" is selected for the track mode, you can adjust the position of Y cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of AY and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the vertical position of Cursor A (Y cursor).

- Click or tap the input field of BY and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the vertical position of Cursor B (Y cursor).

- Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the AY BY menu item to adjust the vertical

position of Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) simultaneously. The vertical

spacing between Cursor A and Cursor B (Y cursors) remains unchanged.

Measurement Example

Measure the waveforms of CH1 and CH2 with Cursor A and Cursor B, respectively.

Then, expand the waveforms horizontally, and you will find that the cursor will track

the point that has been marked, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 10.13 Track Measurement (before Horizontal Expansion)

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

182

Figure 10.14 Track Measurement (after Horizontal Expansion)

Close the Cursor Measurement Result Window

Click or tap Remove to close the cursor measurement result display window at the

right side of the screen.

10.6.3 XY Mode

In the Cursors menu, click or tap XY for the Mode item to enable the XY cursor

measurement function. The measurement results are displayed at the right side of the

screen under the "Result" list.

Figure 10.15 XY Mode

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

183

Tip

By default, XY mode is unavailable. It is only available when the horizontal time base mode is

"XY".

To add the XY mode, click or tap the

Windows icon at the upper-right part of the screen to

enter the Add Window interface. In the Diagram menu, click or tap "XY", and then click or tap

Add to open the "XY horizontal time base window". Only when you have made such

settings, can the XY mode be available for the cursor mode under the Cursors menu.

Adjust Cursor Position

• Click or tap to select the "X" tab under the

Select menu item to set the X value

for the specified cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of AX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the X value at Cursor A.

- Click or tap the input field of BX and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the X value at Cursor B.

- Click or tap to select "ON" for the AX BX menu item to adjust the X value at

Cursor A and the X value at Cursor B simultaneously.

• Click or tap to select the "Y" tab under the Select menu item to set the Y value

for the specified cursor.

- Click or tap the input field of AY and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the Y value at Cursor A.

- Click or tap the input field of BY and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the Y value at Cursor B.

- Click or tap to select "ON" for the AY BY menu item to adjust the Y value at

Cursor A and the Y value at Cursor B simultaneously.

During the adjustment, the measurement results will change accordingly. The

adjustable range is limited within the screen.

Close the Cursor Measurement Result Window

Click or tap Remove to close the cursor measurement result display window at the

right side of the screen.

Measure

DS70000 User Guide

184

11 Digital Voltmeter (DVM)and Frequency Counter

DS70000 series oscilloscope provides a built-in digital voltmeter (DVM) and frequency

counter, which enable you to perform an accurate measurement, improving user

experience in counter and frequency measurement.

11.1 Digital Voltmeter (DVM)

The built-in DVM of this oscilloscope provides 3-digit voltage measurements on any

analog channel. DVM measurements are asynchronous from the oscilloscope's

acquisition system and are always acquiring.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen to

enable the DVM measurement menu. You can also click or tap the "DVM" icon at the

top of the screen to enable the DVM measurement. At this time, the result list is

displayed at the right section of the screen, showing the voltage and mode. As shown

in the figure below:

The specific value above shows the measurement extrema over the last 3 seconds.

Click or tap the DVM result list, and then two sub-menus are displayed: Remove and

Setting. Click or tap Setting to enter the DVM setting menu.

Digital Voltmeter (DVM)and Frequency Counter

DS70000 User Guide

185

Figure 11.1 DVM Setting Menu

To exit the DVM setting menu, click or tap Remove shown at the left side of the DVM

result list. You can also click or tap Remove in the DVM Setting menu.

11.1.1 Measurement Settings

After the DVM is enabled, the DVM result list displayed at the right section of the

screen. Click or tap the result list, and then select Setting. Then the DVM interface is

displayed. You can set the DVM parameters such as measurement source, mode, and

limit value setting.

Select Measurement Mode

Click or tap to select the desired mode under the Mode menu. The DVM

measurement modes include AC RMS, DC, and AC+DC RMS.

• AC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data, with the DC

component removed.

• DC: displays the average value of the acquired data.

• AC+DC RMS: displays the root-mean-square value of the acquired data.

Select the Measurement Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the

measurement source.

Even if the analog channel (CH1-CH4) is not enabled, you can still perform the DVM

measurement.

Digital Voltmeter (DVM)and Frequency Counter

DS70000 User Guide

186

Set the Limits

When setting the limits, you can select when to turn on or off the beeper once it

reaches the limit line.

• Limits Condition Setting

Click or tap to select the desired condition under the When menu. The limits

conditions include "In Limits" and "Out Limits".

- In Limits: when the voltage value is within the limits, you can enable or

disable the beeper to sound an alarm.

- Out Limits: when the voltage value is outside of the limits, you can enable

or disable the beeper to sound an alarm.

• Upper/Lower Limit Setting

Click or tap the input field of Upper, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the upper limit of the voltage.

Click or tap the input field of Lower, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the lower limit of the voltage.

11.1.2 Remove the Measurement

Click or tap the DVM result list, and then two menu items are displayed at its left side.

Click or tap Remove to clear the measurement result. Then the DVM result list is

disappeared. You can also click or tap Remove in the DVM setting menu shown by

clicking or tapping Setting at the left side of DVM result list.

11.2 Frequency Counter

The frequency counter analysis function provides frequency, period, or edge event

counter measurements on any analog channel.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen to

enable the frequency counter. You can also click or tap the "Counter" icon at the top

of the screen to enable the frequency counter. At this time, the result list is displayed

at the right section of the screen, showing the current measurement results of the

frequency counter. As shown in the figure below:

Digital Voltmeter (DVM)and Frequency Counter

DS70000 User Guide

187

Click or tap the frequency counter result list, and then three sub-menus are displayed:

Reset Stat., Remove, and Setting. To exit the frequency counter setting menu, click

or tap Remove shown at the left side of the frequency counter result list. You can also

click or tap Remove in the Setting menu of the frequency counter.

11.2.1 Measurement Settings

After the frequency counter is enabled, the frequency counter result list displayed at

the right section of the screen. Click or tap the result list, and then select Setting.

Then the frequency counter interface is displayed. You can set the parameters such as

measurement source, measurement item, and resolution.

Figure 11.2 Frequency Counter Setting Menu

Select the Measurement Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. Analog channels (CH1-CH4) and EXT can be selected as the source of

the frequency counter.

Digital Voltmeter (DVM)and Frequency Counter

DS70000 User Guide

188

Set Resolution

For Period and Frequency measurements, you need to set the readout resolution.

Click or tap the input field of Resolution to set the resolution by using the pop-up

numeric keypad. The range of resolution is from 3 bits to 8 bits. By default, it is 5 bits.

The greater the resolution, the longer the gate time. In this way, the measurement

time will be longer.

Select the Measurement Item

The measurement items supported by the frequency counter of this oscilloscope

include Frequency, Period, and Totalize measurements. Wherein, Totalize indicates the

count of edge events on the signal.

Select the desired measurement item from the Measure menu: Frequency, Period,

and Totalize.

Clear Count

When "Totalize" is selected as the measurement item, the oscilloscope measures the

count of edge events on the signal. At this time, click or tap Clear Count to clear the

measurement results.

Statistics Results

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Statistic item to enable/disable the statistical

function. When enabled, all the statistical results will be displayed in the "frequency

counter" result list.

11.2.2 Reset Statistics

Click or tap Reset Stat. to reset the statistics.

11.2.3 Remove the Measurement

Click or tap the frequency counter result list, and then three menu items are displayed

at its left side. Click or tap Remove to clear the measurement result. The frequency

counter result list is disappeared. You can also click or tap Remove in the counter

setting menu shown by clicking or tapping Setting at the left side of the frequency

counter result list.

Digital Voltmeter (DVM)and Frequency Counter

DS70000 User Guide

189

12 Real-time Eye Analysis (Option)

The DS70000 series oscilloscope provides the real-time eye plot and measurement

with the clock recovery function. If you have purchased and activated the DS70000-

JITTA option, the oscilloscope also supports the real-time eye diagram function.

An eye diagram is a view of a signal. A real- time eye accomplishes this by acquiring

data, performing clock recovery, then superimposing (folding) successive unit

intervals within a single plot. This is a statistical view in the form of a color grade. The

eye analysis function is usually used to observe the waveforms of the Receive signal

to analyze the impact of inter-symbol interference (ISI) and noise on the system

performance.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen to

open the function navigation. Then, click or tap the Eye icon to enter the "Eye" setting

menu. You can also click or tap the "Eye" icon at the top of the screen to enter the

"Eye" setting menu.

Figure 12.1 Eye Diagram Setting Menu

Real-time Eye Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

190

If you have purchased the decoding option, activate it according the descriptions in

To View the Option Information and the Option Installation

12.1 To Enable or Disable the Eye Analysis Function

In the "eye" setting menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Enable menu to enable

or disable the eye analysis function. When enabled, the eye diagram window is

displayed on the screen.

Figure 12.2 Eye Measurement Result

Tip

The eye diagram can only be obtained when the horizontal time base is less than or equal to 1

ms/div.

12.2 To Select the Source of the Eye Diagram

In the "Eye" setting menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the

desired source from the drop-down list. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be

selected to be the eye source.

12.3 Threshold Settings

In the eye setting menu, you can set the high, middle, and low threshold values.

• Set the high threshold

Click or tap HighThres, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the high

threshold.

Real-time Eye Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

191

If you reduce the high threshold to a value below the set middle threshold, the

oscilloscope will adjust the high threshold automatically to make it greater than

the middle threshold.

• Set the middle threshold

Click or tap the input field of MidThres, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the middle threshold.

The middle threshold is limited by the set low threshold and high threshold.

• Set the low threshold

Click or tap LowThres, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the low

threshold.

If you increase the low threshold to a value above the set middle threshold, the

oscilloscope will decrease the low threshold automatically to make it smaller

than the middle threshold.

12.4 To Set Clock Recovery

The clock recovery provides an ideal clock for comparison to actual signal edges.

In the "Eye" setting menu, click or tap Constant, PLL, or Explicit under the

RecoveryType menu.

1 Setting method for constant clock recovery

Click or tap to select "Constant" in the RecoveryType menu.

- Set the data rate type.

Click or tap to select the desired data rate type under the Type menu. The data

rate type for Constant includes Auto, Semi-Auto, and Manual.

- Auto: recovers the clock based on the narrowest pulse of the signal.

- Semi-Auto: recovers the clock by the manually preset data rate and the

signal edge.

- Manual: recovers the clock by the data rate input manually.

- Set the data rate

Click or tap the input field of Data Rate, then use the pop-up numeric keypad

to set the data rate.

2 Setting method for phase-locked loop (PLL)

Click or tap to select "PLL" in the RecoveryType menu.

- Set the data rate

Real-time Eye Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

192

Click or tap the input field of Data Rate, then use the pop-up numeric keypad

to set the data rate.

- Set the PLL order

This oscilloscope supports first-order PLL and second-order PLL. Select "1st

Order" or "2nd Order" from the PLL Order menu.

- Set the loop BW

Click or tap the input field of Loop BW to set the loop bandwidth by using the

pop-up numeric keypad.

- Set the damping factor

When PLL order is set to "2nd Order", you need to set the damping factor. It is

the damping factor of the transfer function. Click or tap the input field of

DampFactor to set the damping factor by using the pop-up numeric keypad.

The typical damping factor is 1.0 and 0.707. The former is critically damped, and

the latter is the ideal or optimal value.

3 Setting method for external clock recovery

Click or tap to select "Explicit" in the RecoveryType menu.

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the source of

the external clock.

12.5 To Set the Data Rate

In the eye setting menu, you can set the data rate type and data rate.

Type

Click or tap the data rate type: Auto, Semi-Auto, and Manual.

Data Rate

When the data rate type is set to "Semi-Auto" or "Manual", you can set the data rate.

Click or tap the input field of Data Rate and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the data rate. Its range is from 100 k to 4 G. Its default value is 10 M.

12.6 Eye Measurement Result

In the "eye" setting menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Result menu to enable

or disable the display of the measurement results. When enabled, the "Result" list at

the right side of the screen shows the eye measurement result.

Real-time Eye Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

193

• One: indicates "1" level.

• Zero: indicates "0" level.

• Width: indicates the width of an eye diagram.

• Height: indicates the height of an eye diagram.

• Amp: indicates the amplitude of an eye diagram.

• Cross: indicates the crossing percentage of an eye diagram.

• Q Factor: indicates the Q factor.

The diagram of the eye measurement parameters are as shown in the figure below:

Figure 12.3 Diagram of Eye Measurement Parameters

Click or tap the eye measurement result list, and then two sub-menus are displayed:

Remove and Setting.

• Click or tap Setting, then the eye diagram menu is displayed, as shown in

Figure

12.1

Real-time Eye Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

194

• To close the measurement result list, click or tap Remove.

12.7 To Set the Display-related Parameters

Noise Rejection

Noise rejection can eliminate the burst glitch in the actual circuit. The noise rejection

is set automatically by the system and cannot be modified manually.

Persistence

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Persistence menu to enable or disable the

persistence function.

Reset Color

Click or tap Reset Color to clear the color level counter.

Grid

Sets the Grid of the instrument. For details, refer to

To Set the Screen Grid

Real-time Eye Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

195

13 Jitter Analysis (Option)

The jitter analysis function is mainly used to analyze the integrity of the high-speed

serial signal and measure the variance of a measurement over time. The measurement

items include total jitter (TJ), random jitter (RJ), deterministic jitter (DJ), period jitter

(PJ), data-dependent jitter (DDJ), duty cycle distortion (DCD), inter-symbol

interference (ISI), and bit ratio (BR).

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen to

open the function navigation. Then, click or tap the Jitter icon to enter the "Jitter"

setting menu.

Figure 13.1 Jitter Setting Menu

If you have purchased the decoding option, activate it according the descriptions in

To View the Option Information and the Option Installation

Jitter Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

196

13.1 To Enable or Disable the Jitter Function

In the "jitter" setting menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Enable menu to

enable or disable the jitter analysis function. When enabled, the jitter diagram

window is displayed on the screen.

13.2 To Set Parameters

In the "Jitter" setting menu, set the following parameters.

Select the Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The analog channel (CH1-CH4) can be selected to be the jitter source.

Threshold Settings

For details about setting the jitter measurement threshold, refer to

Threshold

Settings

Set Clock Recovery

For setting methods of the clock recovery in the jitter, refer to descriptions in

To Set

Clock Recovery

TIE Slope

TIE indicates the time interval error. The TIE measurement compares the edges in a

data signal with the edges in an ideal data signal determined by the clock recovery

feature to generate error statistics.

Set the Data Rate

For the jitter data rate type and data rate, refer to descriptions in

To Set the Data

Rate

To Set the Display Format of the Jitter Measurement Result

The jitter measurement results will be displayed in the jitter window. You can click or

tap to select "Trend", "Spectrum", or "Histogram" as the display format.

• Trend: The trend graph can display the trend of the jitter measurement results.

The data obtained from the waveforms of the same frame are generated to form

a curve, which enables users to find out the cause for jitter.

When the clock recovery method is set to "PLL", the PLL system cannot reach the

expected ideal clock frequency until it reaches the specified lock time. During the

lock time, the TIE jitter measurement results based on the ideal recovery clock

are incorrect. The data produced during this time will be discarded in data

processing. Therefore, in the TIE jitter trend graph based on the PLL recovery,

part of trend graph at the left section of the screen will be lost.

Jitter Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

197

• Spectrum: The spectrum graph shows the waveforms of the trend diagram

through the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform).

• Histogram: The histogram shows the distribution of the jitter measurement

results. Wherein, Gaussian distributions indicates random jitter, and non-

Gaussian jitter has deterministic components.

Smooth

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Smooth menu item to enable/disable the the

smooth operation for the jitter.

Reset

Click or tap Reset, and then the instrument will restart the jitter measurement.

13.3 To View the Jitter Measurement

In the jitter setting menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Result menu to enable

or disable the display of the jitter measurement results. By default, it is OFF. When

enabled, the jitter measurement results are displayed at the right side of the screen

under the "Result" list.

The measurement results includes the following measurement items:

• Tj: indicates the total jitter.

• Rj: indicates the random jitter. It is compliant with the Gaussian distribution, and

its source can be thermal noise, shot noise, and random noise, with non-

stationary interference.

• Dj: indicates the deterministic jitter. It has non-Gaussian distribution and is

bounded. It is characterized by Gaussian Probability Density Function (PDF) and

in scattered distribution. It may be generated due to the bandwidth, reflection,

crosstalk, EMI, ground bounce, and period modulation.

Jitter Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

198

• Pj: indicates the periodic jitter. The TIE time trend of the periodic jitter is

repeated and periodic. It is caused by external deterministic noise sources

coupling into a system, such as measuring teh periodic waveforms, system clock

(with the jitter frequency above MHz level), or switching power supply (with the

jitter frequency above KHz level).

• DDJ: indicates data-dependent jitter. It refers to any jitter that is correlated with

the bit sequence in a data stream. DDJ is often caused by the frequency

response of a cable or device.

• DCD: indicates duty cycle distortion. It is caused by the asymmetrical rise time

and fall time; or the non-optimal choice of reference level. The crossing

percentage in the eye diagram is similar to DCD.

• ISI: indicates the inter-symbol interference. It is also called data-dependent jitter

(DDJ) or pattern-dependent jitter. It is caused by the effects of the transmission

link, reflection, etc.

The signal transmits due to unmatched impedance. The transmitted signal is

superimposed on the original signal, increasing the signal amplitude, causing

more time spent on level conversion. The constant unchanged symbol pattern

will reach a higher level, and more time is required to reach the threshold level

during hopping, causing signal jitter. As the amplitude of the jitter is related to

the pattern, it is also called pattern-dependent jitter (PDJ).

• BR: indicates bit ratio.

Click or tap the jitter measurement result list, and then two sub-menus are displayed:

Remove and Setting.

• Click or tap Setting, then the jitter diagram menu is displayed, as shown in

Figure 13.1

• To close the measurement result list, click or tap Remove.

Jitter Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

199

14 Reference Waveform

DS70000 series oscilloscope provides 10 reference waveform positions (Ref1 ~ Ref10).

In the actual test process, you can compare the signal waveform with the reference

waveform to locate the failure.

14.1 To Enable Ref Function

To enter the Ref menu, perform any of the following operations:

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select Ref to enter the reference waveform function menu.

• Tap the Ref icon on the small screen at the right side of the screen to enter the

“Ref” menu.

Figure 14.1 Reference Waveform Menu

When the Ref function is enabled, you can select different color for each reference

waveform, set the source of each reference channel, adjust the vertical scale and

offset of the reference waveform, save the reference waveform to the internal or

external memory, and recall it when needed.

Reference Waveform

DS70000 User Guide

200

14.2 To Set the Reference Waveform

In the Ref menu, you can specify a channel to serve as the reference channel. You can

save or clear the reference channel.

To Select the Reference Channel

Click or tap the drop-down button of Current to select the reference waveform

channel (Ref1-Ref10) from the drop-down list. By default, Ref1 is enabled.

To Select the Ref Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired reference

waveform source (CH1~ CH4 or Math1~ Math4).

To Save the Reference Waveform to Internal Memory

Click or tap SaveToRef to save the displayed waveform for the specified source to the

internal memory as the reference waveform.

Caution

This operation only saves the reference waveform to the volatile memory, and the

waveform will be cleared at power-off or restoring to the default settings.

To Clear the Specified Reference Waveform

Click or tap Clear to clear the specified reference waveform for the "current

channel".

You can also click or tap the "Clear" icon in the function navigation menu or the Clear

icon on the small screen to clear the reference waveforms of all the reference

channels.

14.3 To Set the Ref Waveform Display

After clicking or tapping SaveToRef to save the reference waveform to the internal

memory, you can adjust the vertical scale and offset of the reference waveform

specified under Current.

Modify the Vertical Scale

Click or tap the input field of VScale, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the vertical scale of the reference waveform. You can also directly click or tap the icon

at the right side of the input field of VScale to increase or decrease the vertical

scale value. As shown in the figure below:

Reference Waveform

DS70000 User Guide

201

Modify the Vertical Offset

Click or tap the input field of VOffset, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the vertical offset of the reference waveform. You can also directly click or tap the

Up and Down arrow icon at the right side of the input field of VOffset to

increase or decrease the vertical offset value. As shown in the figure below:

Restore the Reference Waveform

If you have adjusted the vertical scale and offset for the specified reference waveform

of the current channel, to reset the reference waveform to the position where the

source channel stays prior to the Save operation, click or tap Reset.

Set the Reference Waveform Color

DS70000 series oscilloscope provides five colors (gray, green, light blue, red, and

orange) to mark the reference waveforms of different channels in order to distinguish

them.

Click or tap the drop-down button of Color to select the color of the reference

waveform of the channel.

Set the Reference Waveform Label

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the specified reference waveform.

Click or tap the input field of "Label" to set the label of the specified reference

channel with the pop-up numeric keypad.

14.4 Export and Import Operation

To Export to Internal or External Memory

You can save the current reference waveform to the internal memory or external USB

storage device. The file format of the reference waveform is "*.ref", "*.bin", or "*.csv".

Click or tap Export to enter the reference waveform file saving interface.

• Set the Format

In the file saving interface, click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select

"*.ref", "*.bin", or "*.csv" as the saving format.

• Set the Filename

Click or tap the input field of

File Name, then the filename editing interface is

displayed. Input the filename with the pop-up numeric keypad.

Reference Waveform

DS70000 User Guide

202

For the methods of using the numeric keypad, refer to descriptions in

Parameter

Setting Method

• Set the Save Path

Click or tap the input field of File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. The interface is shown in the following figure:

Figure 14.2 Disk Management Interface

Through the disk management menu, you can save the current reference

waveform to the internal memory or external USB storage device. Only when the

reference waveform is saved, can this export function be valid. For details about

the disk management operation, refer to the

Disk Management

section in

Store

and Load

. Then, click or tap Save to complete the save operation.

Tip

DS70000 series oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB storage device of FAT32

format.

For the "*.bin" format file, refer to

Binary Data Format (.bin)

To Import from Internal or External Memory

You can import the stored reference waveform file from the internal memory or

external USB storage device to the internal instrument and display the file on the

screen.

Click or tap

Import to enter the reference waveform file loading interface.

• Set the Format

Reference Waveform

DS70000 User Guide

203

In the file loading interface, click or tap the drop-down button of Format to

select "*.ref" as the loading format.

• Set the Load Path

Click or tap the input field of File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed.

Through the disk management menu, you can load the current reference

waveform to the waveform view of the oscilloscope. For details about the disk

management operation, refer to the

Disk Management

section in

Store and

Load

. Then, click or tap Load to complete the load operation.

Reference Waveform

DS70000 User Guide

204

15 Pass/Fail Test

During the product design and manufacturing process, you usually need to monitor

the variations of the signal or judge whether the product is up to standard. The pass/

fail test function of DS70000 series oscilloscope can accomplish this task perfectly.

To enter the Pass/Fail menu, perform any of the following operations:

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen to open the function navigation. Then, click or tap the Pass/Fail icon to

enter the "Pass/Fail" setting menu.

• You can also tap the Pass/Fail icon on the small screen to enter the "Pass/Fail"

setting menu.

Figure 15.1 Pass/Fail Test Menu

15.1 To Enable or Disable the Pass/Fail Test Function

In the "Pass/Fail" setting menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Enable menu to

enable or disable the pass/fail test function.

Pass/Fail Test

DS70000 User Guide

205

15.2 To Start or Stop the Pass/Fail Test Operation

After the Pass/Fail test function is enabled, click or tap Operate to start or stop the

test operation.

During the test process, the oscilloscope will test the waveforms, display the test

information, and output the test information based on the current of settings. You

can set the test mask, the display status of the test information, and the output form

of a pass/ failed test based on the selected source channel for the test. Then save the

test mask range to the internal or external memory, and then recall it when needed.

Tip

• Only when the pass/fail test function is enabled, can you start or stop the pass/fail test

operation, enable or disable the display of the test information, save and recall the test

mask range.

• After starting the test operation, you can neither modify the source channel nor adjust

the test mask.

The "Pass/Fail" result will be displayed at the right side of the screen under the

"Result" list.

15.3 To Select the Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The available output channels include CH1-CH4.

15.4 Mask

In the Pass/Fail menu, You can self-define the mask of the pass/fail test.

To Create a Mask

Click or tap Create to self-define the mask of the pass/fail test.

Click or tap X Mask and Y Mask respectively to set the horizontal tolerance range

and vertical tolerance range with the pop-up numeric keypad. Then click or tap

Create to apply the currently created mask (the region not covered by blue within the

screen).

To Load a Mask

When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can load the test mask files from the

internal memory or external USB storage device (when detected) and apply them to

the current pass/fail test function.

Click or tap Load to enter the file loading interface. Click or tap the input field of File

Path to load the specified test mask files (in *.pf format) and apply them to the

Pass/Fail Test

DS70000 User Guide

206

current pass/fail test function. For details, refer to descriptions in

Disk Management

section in

Store and Load

Save the Mask

When the pass/fail test function is enabled, you can save the current test mask range

to the internal memory or external USB storage device (when detected) in "*.pf"

format.

Click or tap Save to enter the file saving interface. Click or tap the input field of File

Name and File Path to input the filename and select the desired file path to save the

test mask file to the internal or external memory. For details, refer to descriptions in

Disk Management

section in

Store and Load

15.5 To Set the Output Form of the Test Results

In the Option menu, you can set what the oscilloscope will execute when test results

are detected according to your needs.

Set the output event and Aux output

• Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Aux Output to enable or disable the Aux

output. When enabled, in the Utility menu, the sub-menu AUX Out is

automatically set to "PassFail". When a successful or failed event test is detected,

a pulse will be output from the [AUX OUT] connector. If disabled, the sub-menu

AUX Out is automatically set to "TrigOut", and the output of the [AUX OUT]

connector is irrelevant with the pass/fail test.

• Click or tap "Pass" or "Fail" under Output Event.

Set the output polarity and output pulse width

Click or tap "Positive" or "Negative" under Polarity, then click or tap the input field of

Pulse to set the pulse width. Its range is from 100 ns to 10 ms. By default, it is 1 μs.

Set the error action

Click or tap the check box of Err Action to select one operation that the oscilloscope

will execute once a pass/fail test is detected.

• Stop: indicates stopping test when a a pass/fail test event is found.

• Beeper: indicates that the beeper sounds an alarm when a pass/fail test event is

found (irrelevant with the on/off status of the beeper).

• Screenshot: performs the screenshot operation when a pass/fail test event is

found. If an external storage device is detected, the screenshot will be saved to

the external storage device directly. Otherwise, it will be saved to the local disk.

Pass/Fail Test

DS70000 User Guide

207

If "Screenshot" is selected, "Stop" action will be executed forcibly. The test will be

stopped automatically. After the Screenshot operation is completed, the test will

continue.

15.6 To Enable or Disable the Display of the Statistics of

the Test Results

After the "Pass/Fail" function is enabled, the test result list will be displayed at the

right side of the screen. You can click or tap the icon

at the lower-right corner of

the screen to hide the test result list.

The test results statistics include the number of failed frames, the number of

successful frames, and total number of frames, as shown in the figure below.

Click or tap "Pass/Fail" test result list, the following menu items can be displayed and

you can perform the following operations.

• Click or tap Reset Stat., then the statistics in the "Pass/Fail" test result list will be

reset to 0.

• Click or tap Setting, then the PassFail setting interface is displayed.

• Click or tap Remove, then the pass/fail function is disabled.

Pass/Fail Test

DS70000 User Guide

208

16 RTSA (Option)

DS70000 supports RTSA. To enter the RTSA menu, perform any of the following

operations:

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select RTSA to open the RTSA measurement display window

and enter the RTSA function menu.

• Click or tap the RTSA icon in the quick operation menu bar at the top of the

screen to open the RTSA measurement display window and enter the RTSA

function menu.

• Click or tap the RTSA information label at the bottom of the screen to open the

RTSA measurement display window. Click or tap the label again to enter the

RTSA function menu.

In RTSA, you can set AMPT, BW, FREQ, and SPAN parameters. You can also search the

peak according to the set parameters.

If you have purchased the decoding option, activate it according the descriptions in

To View the Option Information and the Option Installation

16.1 Basic Settings

In RTSA menu, click or tap the Basic tab, then you can set the relevant parameters.

Figure 16.1 Basic Setting Menu

Set the Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The available sources for RTSA include CH1-CH4.

RTSA (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

209

Preset

Click or tap Preset, and all the configurations in the RTSA menu will be restored to

the default settings.

Persistence Time

Click or tap the drop-down button of Persistence Time to select the persistence time

from the drop-down list. The available choices include Min, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1

s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, and Infinite. By default, it is Min and the persistence function is

disabled.

16.1.1 FREQ

In RTSA, the frequency range of a channel can be expressed by either of two groups

of parameters: Start Frequency/Stop Frequency; Center Frequency/Span.

Sets the frequency range of RTSA. Each time the parameters are modified, the

instrument restarts to sweep.

The frequency range of a channel can be set by either of two groups of parameters:

• Start Frequency/Stop Frequency

start

stop

)

• Center Frequency/Span

center

span

)

If any of the four parameters is changed, the other three parameters will make

adjustment automatically to ensure the coupling relationship among them:

center

= (f

start

+ f

stop

)/2

span

= f

stop

- f

start

Center Freq

Click or tap the input field of Center, and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

center frequency. Its range is from 5.00 kHz to 5.00 GHz. Its default value is 2.5 GHz.

• In

SPAN

, when you modify the center frequency, the start and stop frequency

will be modified automatically if the Span value remains unchanged.

• Modifying the center frequency indicates that the frequency is changed along

the current channel horizontally, and the adjustable range should be within the

frequency range specified in the technical specifications of the instrument.

Start Freq

Click or tap the input field of Start, and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the

start frequency. The minimum value is 0.00 Hz. After configuration, the scale value at

the bottom of the RTSA measurement window will be changed accordingly.

RTSA (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

210

When you modify the start frequency, the span and center frequency will be changed.

The changes of span will affect other system parameters. For details, please refer to

the Span section in

SPAN

Stop Freq

Click or tap the input field of End, and use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the stop

frequency. The Max. value is 5.00 GHz. After configuration, the scale value at the

bottom of the RTSA measurement window will be changed accordingly.

When you Data stop frequency, the span and center frequency will be changed. The

changes of span will affect other system parameters. For details, please refer to the

Span section in

SPAN

16.1.2 SPAN

Span indicates the frequency span measured within the RTSA measurement window

range. When you modify the span, the start frequency, the center frequency, and stop

frequency will be modified automatically. For details, refer to

FREQ

. After setting the

span, the sweep restarts.

Sets the span

Click or tap the input field of Span, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the span. Its range is from 10.00 kHz to 5.00 GHz. When the span is set to a maximum

value, the analyzer enters full span mode.

Last Span

Click or tap Last Span to set the span to its last set value.

Full Span

Click or tap Full Span, and the span is set to its maximum value.

16.1.3 BW

Under the BW menu, you can set the parameters such as resolution bandwidth (RBW)

and window.

Set RBW

RBW indicates the resolution bandwidth. It is used to distinguish two signals whose

frequencies are close with each other. Reducing RBW can gain a higher frequency

resolution, but will also prolong the sweep time.

Click or tap the drop-down button of RBW to select the RBW value from the drop-

down list. The available values include 152.59 kHz, 305.18 kHz, 610.35 kHz, 1.22 MHz,

2.44 MHz, 4.88 MHz, 9.77 MHz, and Auto. By default, it is 1.22 MHz. When "Auto" is

selected, the instrument will generate a value not available in the current drop-down

list based on the current configurations.

RTSA (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

211

RBW Mode

Click or tap "Manual" or "Auto" under RBW Auto.

• Manual: selects the desired value from the drop-down button of RBW.

• Auto: selects a proper value automatically from the available values (e.g. 152.59

kHz, 305.18 kHz, 610.35 kHz, 1.22 MHz, 2.44 MHz, 4.88 MHz, and 9.77 MHz) of

the drop-down list of RBW. When Auto is selected for RBW mode, the value of

RBW may be changed.

Set Window Function

Click or tap the drop-down button of Window to select the type of the window

function. The available window type includes Hanning, Rectangular, Blackman-Harris,

Hamming, Flattop, and Triangle. By default, it is Hanning. For details, refer to

descriptions in

Window Function

16.1.4 AMPT

You can modify AMPT parameters to make the signals under test be displayed with

minimal errors in the current window, easy for you to observe.

Set the Reference Level

Click or tap the input field of Ref Level to set the reference level with the pop-up

numeric keypad. Its range and default value are related to the actually input source.

After configuring the reference level, the vertical axis of RTSA measurement result

display window changes according to the configuration. The value of Scale also

changes with the modification of Ref Level.

Set the Reference Level Unit

Click or tap the drop-down button of Unit to select the reference level unit from the

drop-down list. The available units include dBmV, dBµV, and Volts. By default, it is

dBmV. Wherein, dBmV and dBµV are for Log scale; Volts is for Linear scale.

The conversion relations between units are as follows (R indicates reference

impedance):

RTSA (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

212

Set the Scale

Click or tap the input field of Scale to set the scale with the pop-up numeric keypad.

Its range is from 100.00 mdB to 20.00 dB. By default, it is 10.00 dB.

After configuring the scale value, the vertical axis of RTSA measurement result display

window changes according to the configuration. The value of Ref Level also changes

with the modification of Scale.

16.2 Peak Search

The peak search function enables the marker to move to the specific signal peak

point, and then in combination with the function of Delta marker, it can provide a

powerful analysis capability.

Figure 16.2 Peak Search Menu

Enable the peak search function

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the

Peak Search menu to enable or disable the

display of the peak search window. By default, it is OFF.

RTSA (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

213

Set the peak search result list

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Peak Table menu to enable or disable the display

of the peak table. By default, it is OFF.

When the peak table is turned on, the RTSA display window is split into a

measurement window and a peak table display window. The peak table will be

displayed at the lower section of the screen, displaying the searched parameters

(frequency and amplitude) that meet the criteria.

Click or tap "Amp" or "Freq" as a sorting rule for Table Order.

Set the peak parameters

• Click or tap the input field of Peak Number, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the number of peaks. Its range is from 1 to 15. Its default value is

• Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the minimum value of the peak amplitude. Only when the peak is

greater than the peak threshold, can it be judged as a peak.

• Click or tap the input field of Excursion, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the excursion of the peak. It defines the minimum amplitude of

the time the required for a signal to be identified as peak. Its range is from 0.00

dB to 100.00 dB. Its default value is 0 dB.

RTSA (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

214

17 Protocol Decoding

You can use the protocol analysis to discover errors, debug hardware, and accelerate

development easily, ensuring you to accomplish the projects with high speed and

good quality. Protocol decoding is the basis of protocol analysis. Only protocol

analyses with correct protocol decoding are acceptable, and only correct protocol

decoding can identify more error information. This oscilloscope provides four bus

decoding modules (Decode 1, Decode 2, Decode 3, and Decode 4) to make common

protocol decoding (including Parallel (standard), RS232 (option), I2C (option), SPI

(option), LIN (option), CAN (option), FlexRay (option), I2S (option), and 1553B

(option)) for the input signals of the analog channels (CH1-CH4). As the decoding

functions and setting methods of Decode1, Decode2, Decode3, and Decode4, this

chapter takes Decode1 as an example for illustration.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select Decode to enter the "Decode" menu.

• Tap the Decode icon on the small screen at the right side of the screen to enter

the "Decode" menu.

• Click or tap the Decode icon at the top of the screen to enter the "Decode"

menu.

To get the decoding option information, refer to descriptions in

Appendix A: Options

and Accessories

If you have purchased the decoding option, activate it according the descriptions in

To View the Option Information and the Option Installation

17.1 Parallel Decoding

Parallel bus consists of clock line and data line. As shown in the figure below, CLK is

the clock line, whereas Bit0 and Bit1 are the 0 bit and 1st bit on the data line

respectively. The oscilloscope will sample the channel data on the rising edge, falling

edge, or the rising/falling edge of the clock and judge each data point (logic "1" or

logic "0") according to the preset threshold level.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

215

Figure 17.1 Schematic Diagram of Parallel Decoding

In the Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select

Parallel, then configure the parameters for Parallel decoding.

Figure 17.2 Parallel Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

216

17.1.1 Clock Setting (CLK)

Clock Setting (CLK)

Click or tap the drop-down button of CLK select the desired source of the clock

channel (CH1-CH4) from the drop-down list. If "OFF" is selected, no clock channel is

set, and sampling is performed when a hop occurs to the data of the data channel

during decoding.

Threshold

When the clock signal is an analog channel (CH1-CH4), you need to set a threshold.

Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the threshold. The range of the threshold is related to the current vertical scale

and offset.

CLK Edge

In CLK Edge menu, click or tap to select to sample the channel data on the rising

edge, falling edge, or both edges of the clock signal.

• Rising: samples the channel data on the rising edge of the clock.

• Falling: samples the channel data on the falling edge of the clock.

• Both: samples the channel data on the rising edge or the falling edge of the

clock.

17.1.2 Bus Setting

Set the Bus

Click or tap drop-down button of BUS to select the digital bus (CH1-CH4) for Parallel

decoding from the drop-down list.

Table 17.1 Bus Setting

Bus Width Bit X Channel Remarks

CH1 1 0 CH1

Width, Bit X, and CH are

set automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

CH2 1 0 CH2

Width, Bit X, and CH are

set automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

CH3 1 0 CH3

Width, Bit X, and CH are

set automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

CH4 1 0 CH4

Width, Bit X, and CH are

set automatically, and you

cannot modify them.

User

1 to 4, 1 for

default

1 (Default) CH1~CH4

Bit1 to Bit4 are set to CH1

to CH4 respectively.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

217

Set the Threshold Level

To judge logic "1" and logic "0" of the buses, you need to set a threshold for each

analog channel (CH1~ CH4). When the channel signal amplitude is greater than the

preset threshold, it is judged as logic "1"; otherwise logic "0".

Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the threshold. The range of the threshold is related to the current vertical scale

and offset.

Endian

In Endian menu, click or tap to select "Invert" or "Normal" as the endian of the bus.

Polarity

In Polarity menu, click or tap to select "Positive" or "Negative" as the data polarity.

17.1.3 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.1.4 Event Table

The event table displays the decoded data and the corresponding decoding

information in time order in the form of a table. It can be used to observe relatively

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

218

longer decoded data. The decoding information includes the decoded data, the

corresponding line number, and time information.

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Figure 17.3 Parallel Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

17.2 RS232 Decoding (Option)

RS232 serial bus consists of the transmitting data line (TX) and the receiving data line

(RX).

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

219

Figure 17.4 Schematic Diagram of RS232 Serial Bus

The industry standard of RS232 uses "Negative Logic", i.g. high level is logic "0" and

low level is logic "1".

Figure 17.5 Schematic Diagram of Negative Logic

In RS232, baud rate is used to represent the transmission rate (namely bits per

second) of the data. You need to set the start bit, data bits, check bit (optional), and

stop bits for each frame of data.

• Start Bit: indicates when to output data.

• Data Bit: indicates the number of data bits actually contained in each frame of

data.

• Check Bit: used to check whether the data are properly transmitted.

• Stop Bit: indicates when to stop outputting data.

In the

Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select RS232,

then configure the parameters for RS232 decoding.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

220

Figure 17.6 RS232 Decoding Menu

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Quickly apply trigger settings to decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

17.2.1 Source Setting

Set the Tx source and the threshold

Click or tap drop-down button of Tx to select the desired source from the drop-down

list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the threshold of Tx source. The range value is from -5.00 V to 5.00 V. Its default

value is 0 V.

When you modify the threshold of the Tx source channel, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you

stop modifying the threshold.

Set the Rx source and the threshold

Use the same method to select the Rx source and set the threshold. The default state

of Rx is OFF.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

221

Polarity

Click or tap "Positive" or "Negative" under Polarity.

• Positive: Uses negative logic. High level is logic "0" and low level is logic "1".

• Negative: Uses positive logic. High level is logic "1” and low level is logic "0".

Set the baud rate

Click or tap the drop-down button of Baud to select the preset baud rate from the

drop-down list. The available baud rates include 50 bps, 75 bps, 110 bps, 134 bps, 150

bps, and etc.

The oscilloscope supports users to self-define the baud rate. Click or tap the drop-

down button of Baud to select "User" from the drop-down list. Then set the baud rate

with the pop-up numeric keypad.

17.2.2 To Set Data Package

Data

Click or tap the drop-down button of Data to select the data bits from the drop-down

list. The available data bits are 5 bits, 6 bits, 7 bits, 8 bits, and 9 bits.

Parity

It is used to check whether the data transmission is correct. Click or tap the drop-

down button of Parity to select the desired parity mode.

• None: indicates that no check bit appears during the transmission.

• Even: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit is an

even number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "0" should be added

to the check bit.

• Odd: indicates that the total number of "1" in the data bit and check bit is an

odd number. For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, "1" should be added to

the check bit.

Stop Bit

Click or tap the drop-down button of Stop Bit to set the stop bits after each frame of

data. It can be set to 1 bit, 1.5 bits, or 2 bits.

Endian

Click or tap the drop-down button of Endian to select the desired endian.

• LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest bit of

the data is transmitted first.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

222

• MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest bit of

the data is transmitted first.

17.2.3 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.2.4 Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

223

Figure 17.7 RS232 Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

17.3 I2C Decoding (Option)

I2C serial bus consists of the clock line (SCL) and the data line (SDA).

SCL: samples SDA on the of rising or falling edge of the clock.

SDA: indicates the data channel.

Figure 17.8 I2C Serial Bus

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

224

In the Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select I2C,

then configure the parameters for I2C decoding.

Figure 17.9 I2C Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Quickly apply trigger settings to decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

17.3.1 Source Setting

Set the clock channel source and the threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of CLK to select the desired source of the

clock channel (CH1-CH4) from the drop-down list.

• Click or tap the input field of SCL Thre, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the threshold of the clock channel.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

225

When you modify the threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after

you stop modifying the threshold.

Set the data channel source and the threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of SDA to select the desired source of the

data channel (CH1-CH4) from the drop-down list.

• Click or tap the input field of SDA Thre, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the threshold of the data channel.

Exchange Sources

Click or tap "SCL/SDA" or "SDA/SCL" under Exchange to exchange the sources of the

current clock channel and data channel.

Specify whether the address information includes the "R/W" bit

For I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information. The address

information includes the read address and the write address.

Click or tap "Without" or "With" under R/W to select whether the address

information includes the "R/W" bit. When "With" is selected, the "R/W" bit will be

included in the address information and located at the lowest bit; when "Without" is

selected, the "R/W" bit will not be included in the address information.

17.3.2 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.3.3 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

226

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Figure 17.10 I2C Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

Address information in decoding

For I2C bus, each frame of data starts with the address information (read address and

write address). In the address information, "Read" indicates the read address

(

) and "Write" indicates the write address ( ). You can decide

whether to include or exclude the "R/W" bit for the address information.

Error expressions in decoding

In I2C decoding, when ACK (acknowledgment) is 1, ACK error occurs. When the

detected ACK is 1, red error report information (the display form is related to

the value of the horizontal time base) is displayed.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

227

17.4 SPI Decoding (Option)

SPI bus is based on the master— slave configuration and usually consists of chip

select line (CS), clock line (CLK), and data line (SDA). Wherein, the data lines include

the master input/slave output (MISO) data line and master output/slave input (MOSI)

data line. The oscilloscope samples the channel data on the rising or falling edge of

the clock signal (if the source is an analog channel, the oscilloscope will also judge

each data point (logic "1" or logic "0") according to the preset threshold level).

Figure 17.11 SPI Serial Bus

In the Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select SPI,

then configure the parameters for SPI decoding.

Figure 17.12 SPI Decoding Menu

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

228

Bus Status

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Quickly apply trigger settings to decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

17.4.1 To Set the Source

Set the Clock Signal

• Click or tap the drop-down button of CLK to select the desired source of the

clock channel from the drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

• Click or tap the input field of Threshold at the right side of the CLK menu, and

then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold of the clock channel.

• Click or tap "Rising" or "Falling" under Slope to set the instrument to sample

MISO and MOSI on the CLK.

MISO and MOSI Setting

• Click or tap drop-down button of MISO to select the desired source of MISO

from the drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4 and OFF.

• Click or tap the input field of Threshold at the right side of MISO, and then use

the pop-up numeric keypad to set the threshold of the MISO channel.

• Click or tap drop-down button of MOSI to select the desired source of MOSI

from the drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4 and OFF.

Tip

The source channels of MISO and MOSI cannot be set to "OFF" at the same time.

17.4.2 To Set Mode and Data

Mode

Click or tap "Timeout" or "CS" under Mode.

• Timeout:

you can perform frame synchronization according to the timeout, and the

timeout value must be greater than half of the clock cycle. Click or tap the input

field of Timeout, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the timeout

value. The adjustable range of the timeout value is from 8 ns to 10 s. By default,

it is 1 μs.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

229

• CS:

contains a chip select line (CS). You can perform frame synchronization

according to CS. When "CS" is selected,

- Click or tap drop-down button of CS to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

- Click or tap the input field for the Threshold menu item to set the

threshold with the pop-up numeric keypad.

- In CS Polarity menu, click or tap to select "Positive" or "Negative".

Endian

Click or tap the drop-down button of Endian to select the desired endian.

• LSB: indicates Least Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the lowest bit of

the data is transmitted first.

• MSB: indicates Most Significant Bit transmission sequence, i.g. the highest bit of

the data is transmitted first.

Polarity

In Polarity menu, click or tap to select "Positive" or "Negative".

Width Setting

Click or tap the input field of Width, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set

the bits of each frame of data. The setting range is from 4 to 32. By default, it is 8.

17.4.3 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

230

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.4.4 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Figure 17.13 SPI Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

231

17.5 LIN Decoding (Option)

The oscilloscope samples the LIN signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1" or

logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The LIN decoding is required to

specify the LIN　signal protocol version.

In the Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select LIN,

then configure the parameters for LIN decoding.

Figure 17.14 LIN Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Quickly apply trigger settings to decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

17.5.1 Signal Configuration

Set the source and the threshold

• Click or tap drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

232

• Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the threshold of the source channel.

When you modify the threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after

you stop modifying the threshold.

Set the signal

• Click or tap the drop-down button of Baud Rate from the drop-down list. The

available baud rates include 2.4 kbps, 4.8 kbps, 9.6 kbps, 10.0 kbps, 19.2 kbps,

and etc.

• In Parity bit menu, click or tap "With" or "Without" to select whether the data

contain the parity bit.

• In Version menu, select the protocol version that matches the LIN bus signal.

The available versions include "1.X", "2.X", and "Both".

17.5.2 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.5.3 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

233

Figure 17.15 LIN Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

Interpret the Decoded LIN Data

• Break (Sync Break): expressed in Hex, identified as "Break:".

• SYNC (Sync): expressed in Hex, identified as "SYNC:".

• ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, identified as "ID:".

• Data (Data): Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin,

or ASCII), identified as "Data:".

• CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, identified as "CRC:". When

errors occur, it is displayed as a red patch for the checksum error.

• Wakeup (wake up symbol): identified as "Wakeup:".

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

234

17.6 CAN Decoding (Option)

The oscilloscope samples the CAN signal at the specified sample position, and judges

each data point to be logic "1" or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level.

You need to specify the CAN signal type and sample position for CAN decoding.

In the Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select CAN,

then configure the parameters for CAN decoding.

Figure 17.16 CAN Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Quickly apply trigger settings to decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

17.6.1 Signal Configuration

Set the source and the threshold

• Click or tap drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

235

• Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the threshold of the source channel.

When you modify the threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after

you stop modifying the threshold.

Select the Signal Type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Signal to select a signal type that matches the

CAN bus signal. The available signal types include CAN_H, CAN_L, Rx, Tx, and Diff.

• CAN_H: indicates the actual CAN_H bus signal.

• CAN_L: indicates the actual CAN_L bus signal.

• Rx: indicates the Receive signal from the CAN bus transceiver.

• Tx: indicates the Transmit signal from the CAN bus transceiver.

• DIFF: The CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog source channel by

using a differential probe. Connect the probe's positive lead to the CAN_H bus

signal and connect the negative lead to the CAN_L bus signal.

Specify the Standard Signal Rate

Click or tap the drop-down button of Baud to select the preset baud rate from the

drop-down list. The available baud rates include 10.0 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 20.0 kbps, 33.3

kbps, 38.4 kbps, 50.0 kbps, and etc.

Sample Position

Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level

at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from

the start of the bit to the sample point" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure

below.

Figure 17.17 Sample Position

Click or tap the input field of Sample Position to set it by using the pop-up numeric

keypad. The settable range is from 10% to 90%.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

236

Set the Signal Variable Rate

Click or tap the drop-down button of CAN-FD Baud to select the variable baud rate

from the drop-down list. The available baud rates include 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 3 Mbps, 4

Mbps, and etc.

Sample Position (FD)

Click or tap the input field of FD Sample Position to set it by using the pop-up

numeric keypad. The settable range is from 10% to 90%.

17.6.2 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.6.3 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

237

Figure 17.18 CAN Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

Interpret the Decoded CAN Data

• Frame ID: expressed in Hex, identified as "ID:".

• DLC (Data Length Code): expressed in Hex, identified as "DLC:".

• Data: Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or

ASCII), identified as "Data:".

• CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, identified as "CRC:".

• ACK (Acknowledgement): identified as "ACK". When errors (ACK is detected to

be 1) occur, displayed as a red patch.

• R (remote frame): identified as "R:".

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

238

• Stuff (Bit filling error): identified as "Stuff".

17.7 FlexRay Decoding (Option)

FlexRay is a type of differential serial bus configured with three consecutive segments

(i.g. packet header, payload, and packet trailer). The oscilloscope samples the FlexRay

signal at the specified sample position and judges each data point as logic "1" or

logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. The FlexRay decoding is required to

specify the signal type and baud rate.

In the Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select

FlexRay, then configure the parameters for FlexRay decoding.

Figure 17.19 FlexRay Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the

Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Quickly apply trigger settings to decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

239

17.7.1 Signal Configuration

Set the source and the threshold

• Click or tap drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the

drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

• Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the threshold of the source channel.

When you modify the threshold of the clock channel, a dotted line displaying the

current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after

you stop modifying the threshold.

To Select the Signal

Click or tap "A" or "B" under Channel to select a channel that matches the actual

FlexRay bus signal.

Specify the Signal Rate

Click or tap the drop-down button Baud to select a FlexRay baud rate that matches

the FlexRay bus signal. The available baud rate includes "2.5 Mbps", "5 Mbps", and

"10 Mbps".

Set the Signal Type

Click or tap the drop-down button Signal to select a signal type that matches the

actual FlexRay bus signal. The available signal types include "BP", "BM", and "RX/

TX".

Sample Position

Sample position is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level

at this point. The sample position is represented by the proportion of "the time from

the start of the bit to the sample point" to the "bit time", as shown in the figure

below.

Figure 17.20 Sample Position

Click or tap the input field of Sample Position to set it by using the pop-up numeric

keypad. The settable range is from 10% to 90%.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

240

17.7.2 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.7.3 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Figure 17.21 FlexRay Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

241

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of

Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

Interpret the decoded FlexRay frame data

• TSS: transmission start sequence, identified as "TSS:".

• Sync Frame: identified as "SYNC:".

• ID (Frame ID): expressed in Hex, identified as "ID:".

• PL (Payload Length): expressed in Hex, identified as "PL:".

• HCRC (Header Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, identified as

"HCRC:". When error occurs, it is displayed as a red patch.

• CYC (Cycle Number): expressed in Hex, identified as "CYC:".

• Data: Its display format is the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or

ASCII), identified as "Data:".

• TCRC (Header Cyclic Redundancy Check): expressed in Hex, identified as "TCRC:".

When error occurs, it is displayed as a red patch.

17.8 I2S Decoding (Option)

The oscilloscope samples the I2S signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1" or

logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. I2S decoding is required to specify

the serial clock, channel signal, and the data's source channel. You need to set

Alignment, WS Low, and other parameters.

In the Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select I2S,

then configure the parameters for I2S decoding.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

242

Figure 17.22 I2S Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Quickly apply trigger settings to decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

17.8.1 Source Setting

Set the SCLK source and threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of SCLK to select the desired channel (CH1-

CH4) from the drop-down list as the serial clock source.

• Click or tap the input field of SCLK Thre, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the threshold of the SCLK. When you modify the threshold of the

clock channel, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on

the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.

• In SCLK Edge menu, click or tap to select "Rising" or "Falling" as the desired

clock edge.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

243

Set the WS source and threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of WS to select the desired channel (CH1-

CH4) from the drop-down list as the WS source.

• Click or tap the input field of WS Thre, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad

to set the threshold of the WS signal. When you modify the WS threshold, a

dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on the screen. It

disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.

Set the SDA source and threshold

• Click or tap the drop-down button of SDA to select the desired SDA source

(CH1-CH4) from the drop-down list.

• Click or tap the input field of Data Thre, and then use the pop-up numeric

keypad to set the threshold of the data signal. When you modify the data

threshold, a dotted line displaying the current threshold level is displayed on the

screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop modifying the threshold.

17.8.2 Bus Setting

Set the word size

Click or tap the input field of Word Size, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the word size. Its range is from 4 to 32.

Set the receiver word size

Click or tap the input field of Receive, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the receiver word size. Its range is from 4 to 32.

Set the endian

In Endian menu, click or tap to select "LSB" or "MSB". By default, it is "MSB".

Set the alignment mode

Click or tap the drop-down button of Alignment to select the alignment way for data

signal. The available choices include "I2S", "LJ", and "RJ".

Set the audio polarity

Click or tap the drop-down button of WS Low to select "Left" or "Right".

Set the data polarity

In Data Polarity menu, click or tap to select "Positive" or "Negative".

17.8.3 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

244

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.8.4 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Figure 17.23 I2S Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

245

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

17.9 1553B Decoding (Option)

The oscilloscope samples the 1553B signal, and judges each data point to be logic "1"

or logic "0" according to the preset threshold level. 1553B decoding is required to

specify the data channel source and the threshold.

In the Decode menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Type to select 1553B,

then configure the parameters for 1553B decoding.

Figure 17.24 1553B Decoding Menu

Bus Status

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Bus Status menu item to enable/disable the

bus decoding.

Quickly apply trigger settings to decoding

Copy trig indicates applying the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Click or tap Copy Trig to apply the trigger settings to the specified decoding setting.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

246

17.9.1 To Set the Data Channel Source and the Threshold

Select the Data Channel

Click or tap the drop-down button of Data to select the desired data channel source

(CH1-CH4) from the drop-down list.

Set the Threshold

Click or tap the input field of Threshold, and then use the pop-up numeric keypad to

set the threshold of the source channel.

When you modify the threshold of the channel, a dotted line displaying the current

threshold level is displayed on the screen. It disappears in about 2 s after you stop

modifying the threshold.

17.9.2 Display-related Setting

In Decode menu, set the following display-related parameters.

Set the Display Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of the bus

data from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec", "Bin", or

"ASCII".

Set the Label Display

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Label menu to enable or disable the label display

of the decoding bus. When enabled, the bus label will be displayed at the upper-left

side of the bus (when the bus display is enabled). The label shows the current bus

type.

17.9.3 Event Table

Open or Close the Event Table

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Event Table menu to enable or disable the

display of the event table. When enabled, the following event table is displayed, as

shown in the figure below. You can also click or tap the icon at the upper-right

corner of the table to close the event table.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

247

Figure 17.25 1553B Decoding Event Table

Tip

• When you adjust the horizontal time base, the waveform displayed on the screen will also

change, and the total number of lines containing the decoding information in the event

table will also be changed.

• The displayed decoded data information in the bus is related to the value of the

horizontal time base. Reducing the horizontal time base can help you view the detailed

information.

Set the Event Table Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select the display format of "Data" in

the event table from the drop-down list. The available options include "Hex", "Dec",

"Bin", or "ASCII".

Interpret the Decoded 1553B Data

• C/S: command/status word. It is expressed in "C/S" form.

• RTA: remote terminal address of the command/status word. It is expressed in

"RTA:" form.

• C/S data: the rest data value of the command/status word. Its display format is

the same as that of the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or ASCII), displayed as "C/S:".

• Parity bit: displayed as a yellow-green patch; when errors occur, displayed as a

red patch.

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

248

• Data word data: data of the data word. Its display format is the same as that of

the bus data (Hex, Dec, Bin, or ASCII), displayed as "Data:".

Protocol Decoding

DS70000 User Guide

249

18 Bus Analysis (Option)

DS70000 series supports USB and ETH bus analysis.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen,

and then select BusAnalyse to enter the "Bus Analyse" setting menu.

After the measurement, the test report will be generated automatically and displayed.

If you have purchased the decoding option, activate it according the descriptions in

To View the Option Information and the Option Installation

18.1 ETH Bus Analysis

In the Bus Analyse menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Bus Select to select

"ETH Analyse" from the drop-down list. Then configure the ETH bus analysis settings.

Figure 18.1 ETH Bus Analysis Configuration Menu

Select the ETH signal protocol

Under the Signal menu, only "100BaseT" is available for you to choose.

Bus Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

250

Configure the source

Click or tap drop-down button of Source to select the desired source from the drop-

down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

Measurement items

The available measurement items include: "Peak Differential Output Voltage",

"Amplitude Symmetry", "Rise/Fall Time", "Rise/Fall Time Symmetry",

"Overshoot", "Distortion Based on Duty Cycle", "Eye", and "Jitter".

Auto Set

Click or tap Auto Set, then the system will complete the setting for the measurement

parameters.

Launch the test

Click or tap Test, then the system starts to make bus analysis. After the test, the test

results are displayed.

18.2 USB Bus Analysis

In the Bus Analyse menu, click or tap the drop-down button of the Bus Select text

box to select “USB Analyse” from the drop-down list and configure the USB bus

analysis settings.

Bus Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

251

Figure 18.2 USB Bus Analysis Configuration Menu

Select the USB bus type

Click or tap the drop-down button of Type to select the type of the USB bus analysis.

The available types include:

• Device Low Signal

• Host Low Signal

• Device Full Signal

• Host Full Signal

• Device High Signal

• Host High Signal

Configure the source

• When the USB bus type is "Device Low Signal", "Host Low Signal", "Device Full

Signal", or "Host Full Signal", you can configure the parameters: Source Dp and

Source Ds.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of

Source Dp to select the desired

source from the drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

Bus Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

252

- Click or tap drop-down button of Source Ds to select the desired source

from the drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

• When the USB bus type is "Device High Signal" or "Host High Signal", you can

configure the parameters: Source Diff and Point.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of Source Diff to select the desired

source from the drop-down list. The sources include CH1-CH4.

- Click or tap the drop-down button of Point to select "Near"or "Far" from

the drop-down list.

Auto Set

Click or tap Auto Set, then the system will complete the setting for the measurement

parameters.

Launch the test

Click or tap Test, then the system starts to make bus analysis. After the test, the test

results are displayed.

Bus Analysis (Option)

DS70000 User Guide

253

19 Multi-pane Windowing

DS70000 supports multi-pane windowing. Users can add multiple windows and result

display windows for display and view.

Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen.

Then click or tap Windows to enter the "Add Window" interface. You can also click or

tap the "Windows" icon in the quick operation bar at the top of the screen to enter

the "Add Window" interface. As shown in the figure below:

Figure 19.1 "Add Window" Interface

Add Diagram Windows

1 First, click or tap "XY", "Math", "RTSA", or "Eye" under the Diagram menu. When a

diagram is selected, its preview and parameter setting items can be displayed at

the upper part of the "Add Window" interface.

Multi-pane Windowing

DS70000 User Guide

254

2 You can set the corresponding parameters according to your needs. For detailed

setting methods, refer to descriptions of relevant chapters.

3 Click or tap Add, then the selected diagram is displayed on the screen.

Add Result Table Window

Click or tap "Measure", "All Measure", or "Decode" under the Result Table menu,

then click or tap Add. The corresponding measurement results will be displayed on

the screen.

Multi-pane Windowing

DS70000 User Guide

255

20 Waveform Recording and Playing

Waveform recording/playing function can play the recorded waveforms of the analog

input channels (CH1-CH4), enabling you to analyze the waveforms better.

20.1 Common Settings

Click or tap the function navigation icon at the lower-left corner of the screen to

open the function navigation. Then, click or tap the Record icon to enter the "Record"

menu. You can also tap the Record icon on the small screen at the right side of the

front panel or the quick operation bar at the top of the screen to enter the "Record"

menu.

Figure 20.1 Waveform Recording Interface

1 Recording Operation

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Record menu to enable or disable the

waveform recording function. Before recording the waveform, you can refer to

descriptions in "

Record Options

" to set the waveform recording parameters.

Waveform Recording and Playing

DS70000 User Guide

256

- Click or tap the Record button under the Record menu to start recording

the waveforms. Then the record icon turns " " from " ".

- During the recording, you can view the recording information under the Play

menu. In the Play menu, the input field of Current shows the number of

currently recorded frames. Under Current is the play progress bar. The left input

field is the start frame and the right input field is the total number of currently

recorded frames. ∆T indicates the time interval between the current frame and

the first frame during the recording process.

- After the recording is completed, the recording marker " " turns out to be

" " and recording stops automatically.

- During recording, you can also click or tap to suspend recording manually.

2 Play Operation

Click or tap the play icon under Play to start playing the recorded waveforms.

Then the play icon turns from the play action " " to the pause action " ". For

details about playing, refer to descriptions in "

Play Option

". During waveform

playing, the value of Current changes dynamically. During playing, you can also

click or tap the icon again to suspend playing manually.

20.2 Record Options

During the waveform recording, the oscilloscope records the waveforms of the

currently enabled channel at a specified interval until you manually stops the

recording operation or the number of recorded frames has reached the set value.

Before recording the waveforms, set the following parameters.

1 Interval

The recording interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the

recording process.

Click or tap Interval, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the time interval

between frames. The available range is from 10 ns to 10 s.

2 Frames

The recording frames refer to the number of frames that can be recorded actually.

After starting the recording operation, the oscilloscope stops the recording

operation automatically when the number of recorded frames reaches the set

value.

Waveform Recording and Playing

DS70000 User Guide

257

Click or tap Frames to set the number of waveform frames to be recorded

currently.The range available is from 1 to the maximum number of frames that can

be recorded currently.

3 Max Frames

The input field of Max Frames displays the maximum number of frames that can

be recorded currently. Click or tap Max, and the maximum number of recorded

waveform frames is automatically input into the input field of Frames.

As the capacity of the waveform memory is fixed, the more the number of points

each frame of waveform has, the less the number of waveform frames that can be

recorded. Therefore, the maximum number of recorded frames is related to the

currently selected "memory depth" (refer to

Memory Depth

). The current memory

depth refers to the number of waveform points per frame. Memory Depth =

Sample Rate x Horizontal Time Base x Number of Grids in the Horizontal Direction.

Therefore, the Max value of waveform recording is also related to the "Sample

Rate" and "Horizontal Time Base". This oscilloscope supports up to 2,000,000

frames real-time and ceaseless waveforms recording.

4 Beeper

: the beeper sounds at the end of recording.

: the beeper does not sound at the end of recording.

20.3 Play Option

Waveform playing function can play back the waveforms currently recorded. In Play

menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tap for the Minimize menu to select whether to

minimize the window. When you click or tap ON, the play window is minimized,

making the interface more simplified, easy for observation and operation. As shown

in the figure below:

Waveform Recording and Playing

DS70000 User Guide

258

Figure 20.2 Play Operation Interface

Before playing the waveforms, set the following parameters.

1 Play Mode

You can play the waveforms in single mode ( ) or cycle mode ( ).

- : plays from the start frame to the end frame, and then stops automatically.

: plays from the start frame to the end frame, then such playback operation

is repeated until you stop it manually.

2 Play Sequence

You can play back the waveforms clockwise ( ) or counterclockwise ( ).

- : plays from the start frame to the end frame.

- : plays from the end frame to the start frame.

3 Interval

The playback interval indicates the time interval between the frames during the

playing process.

Click or tap Interval, then use the pop-up numeric keypad to set the time interval

between frames. The available range is from 1 ms to 10 s.

4 Start Frame

Waveform Recording and Playing

DS70000 User Guide

259

Click or tap the input field of "Start Frame" in

Figure 20.2

to set the start frame for

playing back the waveforms. The default is 1, and the maximum value is the

maximum number of frames recorded.

5 End Frame

Click or tap the input field of "End Frame" in

Figure 20.2

to set the end frame for

playing back the waveforms. The default is the number of frames of the recorded

waveforms.

Waveform Recording and Playing

DS70000 User Guide

260

21 Display Control

In the Display setting menu, you can set the type, persistence time, waveform

intensity, grid type, grid brightness, and etc.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the

screen, and then select Display to enter the "Display" menu.

• Tap the Display icon on the small screen at the right side of the screen to enter

the "Display" menu.

Figure 21.1 Display Setting Menu

21.1 Display Type

In the Display setting menu, click or tap "Vector" under Type to select the waveform

display mode.

Display Control

DS70000 User Guide

261

For the Vector type, the sample points are connected by lines and displayed. In most

cases, this mode can provide the most vivid waveform for you to view the steep edge

of the waveform (such as square waveform).

Figure 21.2 Vector Display

21.2 Persistence Time

In the Display setting menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Persistence Time

to select the persistence time from the drop-down list. The available values are Min,

specific values (i.g. 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s), and Infinite.

In the following part, a frequency sweep signal of the sine waveform is used to show

the waveform effects in different persistence times.

• Min

Enables you to view waveform changing in high refresh rate.

• Specific Values

Enables to view glitches that change relatively slowly or glitches with lower

occurrence probability. The persistence time can be set to 100 ms, 200 ms, 500

ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, or 10 s.

• Infinite

In this mode, the oscilloscope displays the waveform newly acquired without

clearing the waveforms acquired formerly. The waveforms acquired formerly will

be displayed in relatively low-brightness color and the newly acquired

waveforms will be displayed in normal brightness and color. Infinite persistence

can be used to measure noise and jitter and to capture incidental events.

21.3 Intensity

In the Display setting menu, drag the slide bar of Wave Intensity to set the

waveform intensity. The default is 50%, and the range available is from 1% to 100%.

Display Control

DS70000 User Guide

262

21.4 To Set the Screen Grid

In the Display setting menu, click or tap "FULL", "HALF", or "NONE" for the Grid

menu.

• FULL: turns the background grid and coordinate on.

• HALF: turns the background grid off.

• NONE: turns the background grid and coordinate off.

21.5 Display Setting

Grid Brightness

In the Display setting menu, drag the slide bar of Grid Brightness to set the grid

brightness. The default is 50%, and the range available is from 1% to 100%.

Window Transparency

In the Display setting menu, drag the slide bar of Window transparency to set the

window transparency. The default is 50%, and the range available is from 0% to 100%.

21.6 Show Scale

In the Display setting menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Show Scale menu to

enable or disable scale display on the screen. By default, it is ON.

21.7 Color Grade

In the Display setting menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Color Grade menu

to enable or disable the color grade display of the analog channel waveforms on the

screen. By default, it is OFF.

When enabled, different colors are displayed on the screen to indicate the times of

data acquisition or acquisition probability.

21.8 Waveform Freeze

In the Display setting menu, click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Waveform Freeze

menu to enable or disable the waveform freeze function. By default, it is ON.

Display Control

DS70000 User Guide

263

When enabled, the oscilloscope displays the waveform after multiple sampling and

superposition when sampling is stopped by clicking or tapping the STOP/RUN icon

at the top of the screen. If disabled, the last triggered waveform is displayed.

Display Control

DS70000 User Guide

264

22 Storage

You can save the current setups, waveforms, screen image, and parameters of the

oscilloscope to the internal memory or external USB storage device (such as USB

storage device) in various formats and load the stored setups or waveforms when

needed. Also you can load the upgrade software to the system and perform the

upgrade operation for the instrument.

You can also copy, delete, or rename the specified type of file from the internal

memory or external USB storage device via the disk management menu.

This oscilloscope provides two USB HOST interfaces on the front panel and two USB

HOST interfaces on the rear panel, which can all be connected to the USB storage

device for external storage. The USB storage devices connected are marked as

"Removable USB Disk (D)", "Removable USB Disk (E)", "Removable USB Disk (F)",

"Removable USB Disk (G)", and etc.

Tip

This oscilloscope only supports the flash memory USB storage device of FAT32 format.

22.1 To Enter the Storage Menu

To enter the storage setting menu, perform the following operations:

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner corner of

the screen, and then select Storage to enter the storage setting menu.

• Tap the Storage icon on the small screen to enter the storage setting menu.

• Click or tap the Storage icon in the quick operation bar of the large screen to

enter the storage setting menu.

In the Storage setting menu, there are three sub-menus (Save, Load, and Upgrade)

for you to choose. Click or tap to enter the specified sub-menu and configure the

corresponding parameters.

22.2 To Save a File

In the Storage menu, click or tap the Save tab to enter the save setting menu. In this

menu, you can save the image, waveform or setup files.

22.2.1 Save Image

In the Storage menu, click or tap the Save tab to enter the save operation menu. In

this menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Choose to select "Save Image" to

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

265

enter the "Save Image" setting menu. Set the relevant parameters and save the image

to the internal or external memory.

Figure 22.1 Image Saving Setting Menu

Set the image format

• Format:

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select "*.png", "*.bmp", or

"*.jpg" from the drop-down list. Then the screen image will be saved to the

internal or external memory in ".png", ".bmp", or ".jpg" format.

• Invert:

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Invert menu to enable or disable the

waveform invert function.

• Color:

Click or tap "Color" or "Gray" for

Color to select the desired storage color.

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

266

• Header:

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for the Header menu to enable or disable the

display of the header. If you select "ON", the instrument model and the image

creation date will be displayed in the header of the image when you save the

image file.

Set the file saving parameters

• Set the filename

Click or tap the input field of File Name to input the file name to be saved with

the pop-up virtual keypad.

• Set the file path

Click or tap the input field of File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. You can click or tap the saved file to view the saved image file. For

detailed operations, refer to descriptions in

Disk Management

• Overlay

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Overlay menu to enable or disable the

overwriting function. When enabled, the existing file in the specified file path will

be overwritten by the newly saved file that has the same filename as the existing

one.

After a USB storage device (FAT32, Flash type) is connected, press

on the front

panel to make a quick save. If no external USB device is found to be connected to

instrument, the file is saved to the internal memory by default. If an external USB

device is connected, the file is saved to the USB device by default.

22.2.2 Save Wave

In the Storage menu, click or tap the Save tab to enter the save operation menu. In

this menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Choose to select "Save Wave" to

enter the "Save Wave" setting menu. The main setting information (e.g. "On/Off" state

of the channel, vertical scale, and horizontal time base) and waveform data of all

enabled channel will be save to the internal or external memory.

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

267

Figure 22.2 Waveform Saving Setting Menu

Set the waveform source and format

• Data Source

Click or tap the drop-down button of Data Source to select "Screen" or

"Memory" from the drop-down list.

• Waveform Format

Click or tap the drop-down button of Format to select "*.bin" or "*.csv" as the

format of the waveform storage.

Set the file saving parameters

• Set the filename

Click or tap the input field of File Name to input the file name to be saved with

the pop-up virtual keypad.

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

268

• Set the file path

Click or tap the input field of File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. You can click or tap the saved file to view the saved image file. For

detailed operations, refer to descriptions in

Disk Management

• Overlay

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Overlay menu to enable or disable the

overwriting function. When enabled, the existing file in the specified file path will

be overwritten by the newly saved file that has the same filename as the existing

one.

After a USB storage device (FAT32, Flash type) is connected, press on the front

panel to make a quick save. If no external USB device is found to be connected to

instrument, the file is saved to the internal memory by default. If an external USB

device is connected, the file is saved to the USB device by default.

22.2.3 Save Setup

In the Storage menu, click or tap the Save tab to enter the save operation menu. In

this menu, click or tap the drop-down button of Choose to select "Save Setup" to

enter the "Save Setup" setting menu. Save the settings of the oscilloscope to the

internal or external memory in "*.stp" format. When loading, the stored settings can

be recalled.

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

269

Figure 22.3 Setup Saving Setting Menu

Set the file saving parameters

• Set the filename

Click or tap the input field of File Name to input the file name to be saved with

the pop-up virtual keypad.

• Set the file path

Click or tap the input field of File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. You can click or tap the saved file to view the saved image file. For

detailed operations, refer to descriptions in

Disk Management

• Overlay

Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the Overlay menu to enable or disable the

overwriting function. When enabled, the existing file in the specified file path will

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

270

be overwritten by the newly saved file that has the same filename as the existing

one.

After a USB storage device (FAT32, Flash type) is connected, press on the front

panel to make a quick save. If no external USB device is found to be connected to

instrument, the file is saved to the internal memory by default. If an external USB

device is connected, the file is saved to the USB device by default.

22.2.4 Binary Data Format (.bin)

Binary data format stores waveform data in binary format and provides data headers

that describe these data. As data is displayed in binary format, its file size is much

more smaller than that in ASCII format. If several channels are enabled, then all the

displayed channels will be saved (save the first channel then save the second, and

then it goes on like this until all the displayed channels are saved).

In BIN file format, the data are displayed as follows:

• CH1 data

• CH2 data

• CH3 data

• CH4 data

• Math Waveform Data

Binary Header Format

1 File Header

There is only one file header in a binary file. The file header contains the following

information.

Table 22.1 File Header

Two-byte characters, RG, indicating that the file is the RIGOL

binary data file format.

Version Two bytes, indicating the file version.

File Size

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the file. It

includes the header.

Number of

Waveforms

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveforms that are

stored in the file.

2 Waveform Header

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

271

It is possible to store several waveforms in the file. Each stored waveform has a

waveform header. When several channels are stored, each channel can be

considered as a separate waveform. The waveform header contains the

information about the type of waveform data that are stored following the

waveform data header.

Table 22.2 Waveform Header

Header Size A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the header.

Waveform Type

A 4-byte integer, indicating the type of the waveform stored in

the file.

0 = Unknown

1 = Normal

2 = Peak Detection

3 = Average

4 = Not Used

5 = Not Used

6 = Logic

Number of

Waveform Buffers

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform buffers

required to read the data.

Number of Points

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of waveform points in

the data.

Count

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of hits at each time

interval during waveform recording when using a certain

sample mode (e.g. Average) to create the waveforms. For

example, when averaging, a count of 4 indicates that each

waveform data point in the waveform recording has been

averaged at least 4 times. The default value is 0.

X Display Range

A 4-byte float, indicating the X-axis duration of the waveform

that is displayed. For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the

duration of time across the display. If the value is zero, then no

data has been acquired.

X Display Origin

A 8-byte double, indicating the X-axis value at the left edge of

the screen. For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the time

at the start of the display. The value is treated as a double

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

272

precision 64-bit float point number. If the value is zero, then

no data has been acquired.

X Increment

A 8-byte double, indicating the duration between data points

on the X axis. For time-domain waveforms, it indicates the

time between points. If the value is zero, then no data has

been acquired.

X Origin

An 8-byte double, indicating the X-axis value of the first data

point in the data recording. For time-domain waveforms, it

indicates the time of the first point. The value is treated as a

double precision 64-bit float point number. If the value is zero,

then no data has been acquired.

X Units

- A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for X

values in the acquired data.

- 0 = Unknown

- 1 = Volts (V)

- 2 = Seconds (s)

- 3 = Constant

- 4 = Amps (A)

- 5 = dB

- 6 = Hz

Y Units

A 4-byte integer, indicating the unit of measurement for Y

values in the acquired data. The possible values are listed

above under X Units.

Date A 16-byte character array, not used

Time A 16-byte character array, not used

Frame

A 24-byte character array, indicating the model number and

serial number of the oscilloscope in the format:

MODEL#:SERIAL#。

Waveform Label

A 16-byte character array that contains the label assigned to

the waveform.

3 Waveform Data Header

A waveform may have multiple data sets. Each waveform data set has a waveform

data header. The waveform data header consists of information about the

waveform data set. The header is stored before the data set.

Table 22.3 Waveform Data Header

Header Size

A 4-byte integer, indicating the number of bytes in the

waveform data header.

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

273

Buffer Type

- A 2-byte integer, indicating the type of the waveform data

stored in the file.

- 0 = Unknown

- 1 = Normal 32-bit float data

- 2 = Maximum float data

- 3 = Minimum float data

- 4 = Not Used

- 5 = Not Used

- 6 = Digital unsigned 8-bit character data (for digital

channels)

Bytes Per Point

A 2-byte short integer, indicating the number of bytes per

data point.

Buffer Size

A 4-byte integer, indicating the size of the buffer required to

hold the data points.

22.3 Load a File

In the storage setting menu, click or tap the Load tab to switch to the load menu. In

this menu, you can load the local file to the instrument.

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

274

Figure 22.4 Load Setting Menu

Load setup

Click or tap the drop-down button of Choose to select "Load Setup". Then, click or

tap File Path to load the setups from the internal memory or the external USB disk.

The default file type is "*.stp", and no other options are available. Select the file to be

loaded from the memory. Click or tap Load to load the selected file.

22.4 System Upgrade

This instrument supports local upgrade and online upgrade.

Local upgrade

1 In the storage setting menu, click or tap Upgrade to enter the local upgrade

setting menu.

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

275

Figure 22.5 Upgrade Menu

2 Click or tap the input field of File Path, then the disk management interface is

displayed. Select the upgrade file. For detailed operations, refer to the descriptions

Disk Management

3 Click or tap Upgrade to complete the local upgrade.

Online upgrade

1 First ensure that the rear-panel LAN interface is connected to the network (if you

do not have the access to the Internet, please ask the administrator to open the

specified network authority).

2 Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower-left corner of the screen

to enter the function navigation.

3 Then click or tap the Upgrade icon to perform the upgrade operation.

22.5 Disk Management

To enter the storage setting menu, perform the following operations:

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

276

• Click or tap the function navigation icon at the lower- corner corner of the

screen, and then select Storage to enter the storage setting menu.

• Tap the Storage icon on the small screen at the right side of enter the storage

setting menu.

• Click or tap the Storage icon at the top of the screen to enter the storage setting

menu.

Then click or tap Disk at the lower-left corner of the "Storage" menu to enter the disk

management interface, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 22.6 Disk Management Interface

Execute the following operations through the disk management menu:

Select a disk

Before using the external storage device, make sure that a USB storage device (FAT32

format, flash memory) is connected correctly.

By default, the "Local Disk(C)" is selected. If an external storage device is inserted,

under the "Disk" menu, two available storage disks can be selected at the upper-left

corner of the "Disk" interface: Local Disk (C) and Removable USB Disk (D). If you select

an external storage device, for example, if you select "Removable USB Disk (D)", the

contents in USB Disk(D) will be displayed.

Create a folder

Click or tap

New Folder, then a folder name input keyboard is displayed.

For the methods of using the keypad, refer to descriptions in

Parameter Setting

Method

. Click or tap any place on the screen to exit the keyboard.

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

277

Clear the Internal Memory Safely

Click or tap SecurityClear, then a prompt message "Execute secure memory wipe?" is

displayed. Click or tap OK to clear all the files stored in the internal disk. Click or tap

Cancel to cancel security clear operation.

Select a File

Before operating on the file or folder, first select the desired file or folder.

Click or tap the check box at the right side of the file or folder, if checked, it is

selected, with an icon . Click/tap the check box again or click/tap to deselect

it. The check box restores its original state.

DS70000 supports selecting multiple files or folders to operate on. You can also click

or tap the icon at the upper-right corner of the interface to select all the files and

folders under the current disk. Click or tap to cancel the select-all operation.

22.6 Factory Settings

Press on the front panel or click/tap the Default icon at the top of the

screen, then a prompt message "Restore default settings?" is displayed. Click or tap

OK to restore the instrument to its factory default settings, as shown in the table

below.

Table 22.4 Factory Settings

Parameter Factory Settings

Horizontal

Horizontal Scale 5 ns

Horizontal Position 0 s

Delayed Sweep OFF

Roll Auto

Fine OFF

Horizontal Expansion Center

Memory Depth Auto

Vertical

VScale 100 mV

VOffset 0 V

CH1 ON

CH2 OFF

CH3 OFF

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

278

Parameter Factory Settings

CH4 OFF

Channel Coupling DC

BW Limit OFF

Attenuation 1X

Impedance 1 MΩ

Invert OFF

Fine OFF

Channel Unit [V]

Display Label OFF

Channel Delay 0 s

Bias 0 V

Acquire

Acquisition Mode Normal

Memory Depth Auto

Anti-Aliasing OFF

Trigger

Trigger Type Edge Trigger

Source Selection CH1

Slope Rising

Trigger Mode Auto

Trigger Coupling DC

Trigger Holdoff 8 ns

Noise Rejection OFF

Display

Display Type Vector

Persistence Time Min

Intensity 50%

Grid FULL

Grid Brightness 50%

Window Transparency 50%

Show Scale ON

Color Grade OFF

Waveform Freeze ON

Measure

Mode Normal

Indicator OFF

Statistics OFF

Count 1,000

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

279

Parameter Factory Settings

Display Type %

Source CH1

Upper 90%

Mid 50%

Lower 10%

Amplitude Measurement

Method

Auto

Region Main

Storage

Auto Name ON

Header ON

Save Image

Format *.png

Invert OFF

Color Color

Save Wave

Data Source Screen

Format *.bin

Save Setup

File Type *.stp

Load Setup

File Type *.stp

System Setting

Language Simplified Chinese

Load last Default

Beeper OFF

AUX Out TrigOut

Vibration ON

Screen Lock OFF

Expand GND

Show Time ON

Other Setting

DSP ON

EXT 10M IN OFF

Auto Config

Peak to Peak ON

Live CH OFF

Overlay ON

Coupling OFF

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

280

Parameter Factory Settings

Quick Settings

Operation Save Image

Format *.png

Invert OFF

Color Color

Pass/Fail Test

Enable OFF

Source CH1

Operate OFF

X Mask 240 mdiv

Y Mask 480 mdiv

Format *.pf

File Name RigolDS

Aux Output OFF

Output Event Fail

Polarity Positive

Pulse 1 μs

Error Action N/A

Waveform Recording

Waveform Recording OFF

Record

Play

Record

Interval 10 ns

Frames 1,000

Max Frames 10000

Beeper

Play

Mode

Sequence

Interval 100 ms

Math Operation

Invert OFF

Expand GND

Display Label OFF

Grid FULL

A+B

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

281

Parameter Factory Settings

Operation OFF

SourceA CH1

SourceB CH1

Offset 0 V

Scale 500 mV

A-B

Operation OFF

SourceA CH1

SourceB CH1

Offset 0 V

Scale 500 mV

A×B

Operation OFF

SourceA CH1

SourceB CH1

Offset 0 U

Scale 500 mU

A÷B

Operation OFF

SourceA CH1

SourceB CH1

Offset 0 U

Scale 500 mU

FFT

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Offset 0 dBV

VScale 20 dBV

Unit dBm/dBV

X Start-End

Start Freq 0 Hz

Stop Freq 10 MHz

Window Function Hanning

Color Grade OFF

Peak Search OFF

Peak Number 5

Threshold 5.5 dBV

Excursion 1.8 dBV

Table Order Amp Order

A&&B

Operation OFF

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

282

Parameter Factory Settings

SourceA CH1

SourceB CH1

Wave Size Medium

Thre.CH1 0 V

Thre.CH2 0 V

Thre.CH3 0 V

Thre.CH4 0 V

Sensitivity 300 mdiv

Offset 0 div

A||B

Operation OFF

SourceA CH1

SourceB CH1

Wave Size Medium

Thre.CH1 0 V

Thre.CH2 0 V

Thre.CH3 0 V

Thre.CH4 0 V

Sensitivity 300 mdiv

Offset 0 div

A^B

Operation OFF

SourceA CH1

SourceB CH1

Wave Size Medium

Thre.CH1 0 V

Thre.CH2 0 V

Thre.CH3 0 V

Thre.CH4 0 V

Sensitivity 300 mdiv

Offset 0 div

Operation OFF

SourceA CH1

Wave Size Medium

Thre.CH1 0 V

Thre.CH2 0 V

Thre.CH3 0 V

Thre.CH4 0 V

Sensitivity 300 mdiv

Offset 0 div

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

283

Parameter Factory Settings

Intg

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV*s

Offset 0 V*s

Bias 0

Diff

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV/s

Offset 0 V/s

Smooth 5

Sqrt

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

Exp

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mU

Offset 0 U

Abs

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

Low Pass

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

284

Parameter Factory Settings

Offset 0 V

ωc 20 MHz

High Pass

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

ωc 20 MHz

Band Pass

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

ωc1 20 MHz

ωc2 40 MHz

Band Stop

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

ωc1 20 MHz

ωc2 40 MHz

AX+B

Operation OFF

Source CH1

Scale 500 mV

Offset 0 V

A 1

B 0

Ref

Current Ref1

Source CH1

VScale 1 V

VOffset 0 V

Label REF0

Label Display OFF

Color Orange

Storage

DS70000 User Guide

285

23 System Utility Function Setting

In the Utility menu, you can set the I/O parameters and the system-related function

parameters. To enter the "Utility" menu, perform the following operations.

• Click or tap the Notification Area at the lower-right corner of the screen. Then

the Utility menu is displayed.

• Click or tap the function navigation icon

at the lower- corner corner of the

screen, then select Utility to enter the Utility menu.

• Tap the Utility icon on the small screen at the right side of the screen to enter

the Utility menu.

23.1 I/O Setting

In Utility menu, click or tap IO to enter the I/O setting menu to configure the

following parameters.

Network Status

Different prompts will be displayed according to the current network connection

status.

• Network Config Succeeded!

• Acquiring IP...

• IP Conflict!

• Disconnected!

• DHCP Config Failed

• Read Status Fail!

• CONNECTED

• Invalid IP

• IP lost

• Please wait...

MAC Address

For each instrument, the MAC address is unique. When assigning the IP address for

the oscilloscope, the system uses the MAC address to identify the instrument.

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

286

VISA Address

Displays the VISA address currently used by the the instrument.

IP Configuration Type

The configuration type of the IP address can be DHCP, Auto IP, or Static IP. In different

IP configuration types, the configurations for IP address and other network

parameters are different.

• DHCP

If "DHCP" is selected, the DHCP server in the current network will assign the

network parameters (e.g. IP address, Subnet, Gateway, and DNS) for the the

instrument.

• Auto IP

When "Auto IP" is selected, the instrument will acquire the IP address ranging

from "169.254.0.1" to "169.254.255.254" and the subnet mask (255.255.0.0)

automatically based on the current network configuration. The "Auto IP" works

only when "DHCP" is not selected or connection is failed.

• Static IP

If "Static IP" is selected, the instrument is configured with static IP. In this case,

you need to disable DHCP and Auto IP manually. Then you need to configure the

parameters such as "IP address", "Subnet", "Gateway", and "DNS" manually. At

this time, you can self-define the network parameters (e.g. IP address) of the

oscilloscope.

- Set the IP address

The format of the IP address is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first

segment (nnn) of the address is from 0 to 255 (except 127); wherein, the

valid range is from 0 to 223. The range for the other three segments is from

0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for an IP

address available.

This setting will be saved to the non-volatile memory; if "Load last" is set to

"Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the next power-on. The

instrument will load the preset IP address automatically.

- Set the subnet mask

The format of the subnet mask is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Wherein, the range of

"nnn" is from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network

administrator for a subnet mask available.

This setting will be saved in the non-volatile memory; if "Power On" is set to

"Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the next power-on. The

instrument will load the preset subnet mask automatically.

- Set the default gateway

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

287

You can set this parameter in Static IP mode. The format of the gateway is

nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The range of the first segment (nnn) is from 0 to 223

(except 127), and the range for the other three segments is from 0 to 255.

You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a gate address

available.

This setting will be saved in the non-volatile memory; if "Power On" is set to

"Last", then DHCP and Auto IP are disabled at the next power-on. The

instrument will load the preset gateway automatically.

- Set the DNS address

You can set this parameter in Static IP mode. The format of the DNS address

is "nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn". The range for the first segment (nnn) of the address is

from 0 to 223 (except 127); and the range for the other three segments is

from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for

an address available.

Generally, you do not need to set the DNS, therefore this parameter setting

can be ignored.

Tip

• When the three IP configuration types are all turned on, the priority of the parameter

configuration from high to low is "DHCP", "Auto IP", and "Static IP".

• The three IP configuration types cannot be all turned off at the same time.

mDNS

Click or tap the ON/OFF tab for mDNS to enable or disable the multicast Domain

Name System (mDNS). This system is used to provide the function of DNS server for

service discovery in a small network without a DNS server.

Host Name

If mDNS is enabled, you need to configure the mDNS host name, supporting

inputting a maximum of 26-byte strings.

GPIB

When using the GPIB interface, use the USB-GPIB interface converter (an option that

requires to be ordered separately) to extend the GPIB interface, and then use the GPIB

cable to connect the instrument to the PC. Configure the GPIB address. Its settable

range is from 1 to 30. By default, it is 1.

Apply the Network Parameter Setting

Click or tap Apply to validate the current network parameter setting.

23.2 Object Missing

This object is not available in the repository.

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

288

23.3 About this Oscilloscope

In Utility menu, click or tap About, and then you can view the model, version, and

other information about this instrument in About menu.

• Model

Indicates the product model.

• Serial number

Indicates the serial number of the product, the unique identification for the

product.

• Firmware

Indicates the firmware version number of the product.

• Hardware

Indicates the hardware version number of the product.

• Build

Indicates the creation time for the software version.

• Android.Build

Indicates the creation time of the Android operating system.

• Android.Version

Indicates the version number of the Android operating system. For example, 7.1.

• Launcher

Indicates the desktop UI version number of the Android operating system.

• WebControl

Indicates the version number of browser remote control module.

23.4 Other Setting

EXT 10M IN

Indicates the rear-panel 10 MHz IN reference clock input interface. When ON, the

interface is enabled; when OFF, the interface is disabled.

Electronic Tag

When you select ON, the backlight of the electronic tag at the upper-right corner of

the front panel is illuminated; when you select OFF, the backlight turns off.

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

289

23.5 SelfCal

The self-calibration program can quickly make the oscilloscope to work in an optimal

state to get the precise measurement results. You can perform self-calibration at any

time, especially when the changes of the ambient temperature reach or above 5℃.

Make sure that the oscilloscope has been warmed up or operating for more than 30

minutes before the self-calibration.

In "Utility" menu, click or tap SelfCal, the following self-calibration interface is shown

below.

Figure 23.1 Self-calibration Menu

• Click or tap Start, and then the oscilloscope will start to execute the self-

calibration program.

• After starting the self-calibration program, click or tap Exit to cancel self-

calibration operation at any time.

• Click or tap Close to close the self-calibration information window.

23.6 Option List

In the "Utility" menu, click or tap Option list, then all the options that have currently

been installed can be displayed. For the procedures of installing the options, refer to

To View the Option Information and the Option Installation

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

290

23.7 Quick Settings

In the Utility menu, click or tap Quick Settings to enter the quick setting operation

menu.

Figure 23.2 Quick Settings Menu

Save Image

• Click or tap Save Image, then Operation is set to "Save Image".

• In the Format menu item, the available image type can be "*.png", ".*bmp", or

".*jpg".

• Click or tap the ON/OFF button for the

Invert menu item to enable or disable

the invert function.

• Click or tap "Color" or "Gray" for Color to select the desired storage color.

After setting, click or tap the button at the upper-right corner of the

instrument to capture the current screen and save the image with the specified

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

291

format. If an USB storage device is connected, by default, it is saved to the external

memory, otherwise, it will be saved to the specified path in the internal memory.

Save Wave

• Click or tap Save Wave, then Operation is set to "Save Wave".

• Click or tap to select "Memory" or "Screen" under Data Source as the source of

the saved waveform.

• The available choices under Format include "*.bin" and "*.csv".

After setting, click or tap the button at the upper-right corner of the

instrument to save the waveform based on the settings. If an USB storage device is

connected, by default, it is saved to the external memory, otherwise, it will be saved

to the specified path in the internal memory.

Save Setup

Click or tap Save Setup, then Operation is set to "Save Setup".

After setting, click or tap the button

at the upper-right corner of the

instrument to save the setup file suffixed with "*.stp". If an USB storage device is

connected, by default, it is saved to the external memory, otherwise, it will be saved

to the specified path in the internal memory.

All Measurement

• Click or tap All Measure, then Operation is set to "All Measure".

• In All Measure menu item, click or tap the drop-down button to select the

measurement channel (CH1-CH4).

After setting, click or tap the button

at the upper-right corner of the

instrument to perform the measurement on the specified channel.

Reset Statistics

• Click or tap Stat Reset, then Operation is set to "Stat Reset".

• Under Stat Reset, click or tap "Measure" or "Pass/Fail" to reset the statistics of

the specified function.

After setting, click or tap the button at the upper-right corner of the

instrument, then the statistics of the specified function under the Result list at the

right side of the screen will be cleared and new measurement will be launched.

Waveform Recording

Click or tap

Record, then Operation is set to "Record".

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

292

After setting, click or tap the button at the upper-right corner of the

instrument to perform the waveform recording.

Save Group

• Click or tap Save Group, then Operation is set to "Save Group".

• Under Save Group, select one or multiple items from "Save Image", "Save

Wave", and "Save Setup".

After setting, click or tap the button

at the upper-right corner of the

instrument to save the selected items based on the settings. If an USB storage device

is connected, by default, it is saved to the external memory, otherwise, it will be saved

to the specified path in the internal memory.

23.8 Self-check

In Utility menu, click or tap Self Check to enter the "Self Check" setting menu. You

can test the following self-check items for the device.

Key Test

Click or tap Key Test to enter the key test interface (virtual front panel key), as shown

in the figure below.

Figure 23.3 Key Test Interface

At this time, you can press the keys on the front panel to check whether the virtual

keys are highlighted. If yes, it indicates that the keys work normally; if no, it indicates

that there's something wrong with the keys. If the virtual key is not illuminated, the

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

293

key may fail to work. Press RUN/STOP for three consecutive times to exit the key test

interface.

Touch Test

Click or tap Touch Test to enter the touch screen test interface, as shown in the figure

below.

Figure 23.4 Touch Screen Test Interface

Slide with your finger on the screen. If there is a line displaying at the empty area

where you slide on the screen and the box that you tap turns out to be filled with

green background, it indicates that the touch function of this area is normal. Then

press USER to switch to the next touch screen test interface, as shown in the figure

below.

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

294

Figure 23.5 Touch-Enabled Gesture Operation Interface

At this time, you can pinch or stretch the icon R to zoom out or zoom in the icon to

check whether the touch-enabled gestures work normally. Press RUN/STOP for three

consecutive times to exit the touch screen test interface.

Screen Test

Click or tap Screen Test to enter the screen test interface and check whether the

defective pixel exists.

There are 15 screen test interfaces. Press USER to switch to the next screen test

interface. Press RUN/STOP for three consecutive times to exit the screen test

interface.

Board Test

Click or tap Board Test, then the board test interface is displayed. Check whether the

status of each module is in good condition.

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

295

Figure 23.6 Board Test Interface

System Utility Function Setting

DS70000 User Guide

296

24 Remote Control

The instrument can be remotely controlled by the following three methods:

• User-defined Programming

Users can program and control the instrument by using the SCPI (Standard

Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. For details about the

SCPI commands and programming, refer to

Programming Guide

• PC Software

Users can use the PC software to send commands to control the instrument

remotely. RIGOL Ultra Sigma is recommended. You can download the software

from RIGOL official website (

http://www.rigol.com

Operation Procedures:

- Set up communication between the instrument and PC.

- Run Ultra Sigma and search for the instrument resource.

- Open the remote command control panel to send commands.

• Web Control

This instrument supports Web Control. Connect the instrument to the network,

then input the IP address of the instrument into the address bar of the browser

of your computer. The web control interface is displayed. Click Web Control to

enter the web control page. Then you can view the display of the real-time

interface of the instrument. Through the Web Control method, you can migrant

the device control to the control terminals (e.g. PC, Mobile, iPad, and other smart

terminals) to realize remote control of the instrument. When you first log in to

the Web Control, the user name is "admin" and password is "rigol".

This instrument can be connected to the PC via the USB, LAN, or GPIB interface to set

up communication and realize remote control through the PC. The remote control can

be realized by using SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)

commands.

This chapter will illustrate how to use the to work with RIGOL Ultra Sigma software to

remotely control the instrument via various interfaces. Note: When communicating

with the PC via GPIB, the instrument does not support large data transmission

operation such as screen shot and waveform reading.

Caution

Before setting up communication, please turn off the instrument to avoid causing

damage to the communication interfaces.

Remote Control

DS70000 User Guide

297

24.1 Remote Control via USB

1 Connect the device

Use the USB cable to connect the rear-panel USB DEVICE interface of the

instrument to the USB HOST interface of the PC.

2 Search for the device resource

Start up Ultra Sigma and the software will automatically search for the resource

currently connected to the PC via the USB interface. You can also click USB-TMC to

search for the resource.

3 View the device resource

The resources found will appear under the "RIGOL Online Resource" directory, and

the model number and USB interface information of the instrument will also be

displayed.

4 Control the instrument remotely

Right-click the device resource name and select "SCPI Panel Control" to open the

remotely command control panel. Then you can send commands and read data

through the panel. For details about the SCPI commands and programming, refer

to the Programming Guide of this instrument.

24.2 Remote Control via LAN

1 Connect the device

Use the network cable to connect the instrument to your local area network (LAN).

2 Configure network parameters

Configure the network parameters of the instrument according to "

I/O Setting

3 Search for the device resource

Start up Ultra Sigma and click LAN to open the panel as shown in the figure below.

Click Search and the software searches for the instrument resources currently

connected to the LAN and the resources found are displayed at the right section of

the window as shown in the figure below. Click OK to add it.

Remote Control

DS70000 User Guide

298

Besides, you can input the IP address of the instrument manually into the text field

under "Manual Input LAN Instrument IP", then click TEST. If the instrument passes

the test, click ADD to add the instrument to the LAN instrument resource list in the

right section; if the instrument fails the test, please check whether the IP address

that you input is correct, or use the auto search method to add the instrument

resource.

4 View the device resource

The resources found will appear under the “RIGOL Online Resource” directory.

5 Control the instrument remotely

Right-click the device resource name and select "SCPI Panel Control" to open the

remotely command control panel. Then you can send commands and read data

through the panel.

6 Load LXI webpage

As this instrument conforms to LXI CORE 2011 DEVICE standards, you can load LXI

webpage through Ultra Sigma (right-click the instrument resource name and select

"LXI-Web"). Various important information about the instrument (including the

model, manufacturer, serial number, description, MAC address, and IP address) will

be displayed on the webpage. You can also directly input the IP address of the

instrument in the address bar of the PC browser to load the LXI webpage.

24.3 Remote Control via GPIB

1 Connect the device

Use the USB-GPIB interface converter to extend the GPIB interface for the

instrument, and then use the GPIB cable to connect the instrument to the PC to

realize remote control.

2 Install the driver of GPIB card

Correctly install the driver of the GPIB card which has been connected to the PC.

3 Set the GPIB address

Remote Control

DS70000 User Guide

299

Click or tap the Notification Area at the lower-right corner of the screen, then the

Utility menu is displayed. Click or tap IO, and then click or tap the input field of

GPIB to input the GPIB address with the pop-up numeric keypad.

4 Search for the device resource

Start Ultra Sigma, and then click GPIB. A window is displayed as shown in

Figure

24.1

. Click Search and the software searches for the instrument resource currently

connected to the PC via the GPIB interface. The resource found is displayed at the

right of the window, as shown in

Figure 24.2

. Click OK to add it.

Figure 24.1 Search for the Available Device

Figure 24.2 Confirm the Available Device

5 View the device resource

Click OK to go back to the main interface of Ultra Sigma. The searched instrument

resource will be displayed under the directory of "RIGOL Online Resource".

6 Control the instrument remotely

Right-click the device resource name. In the displayed menu, select "SCPI Panel

Control" to open the programming command control panel. Then you can send

commands and read data through the panel.

Remote Control

DS70000 User Guide

300

25 Troubleshooting

1 When I power on the instrument, the instrument stays black and does not

display anything.

a Check whether the power is correctly connected.

b Check whether the power key is really pressed.

c Check whether the fuse is blown. If you need to replace the fuse, use only the

specified fuse that conforms to the product.

d Restart the instrument after finishing the above inspections.

e If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.

2 No waveform of the signal is displayed on the screen.

a Check whether the probe is properly connected to the item under test.

b Check whether there are signals generated from the item to be tested (you can

connect the probe compensation output signal to the faulty channel to locate

the problem, and then determine whether the channel or the item to be tested

has a problem).

c Resample the signal.

d If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.

3 The USB storage device cannot be recognized.

a Check whether the USB storage device can work normally when connected to

other instruments or PC.

b Make sure that the USB storage device is FAT32 format and flash type. The

insrument doesn't support hardware USB storage device.

c After restarting the instrument, insert the USB storage device again to check

whether it can work normally.

d If the USB storage device still cannot work normally, please contact RIGOL.

4 How do you set the amplitude of the waveform in dBm?

a Select the desired channel.

b In the channel setting interface, check whether HighZ under OutputSet is set to

"On". If yes, you cannot set the amplitude of the waveform in dBm at this time.

Select "Off" to disable the HighZ, and use the numeric keypad, the arrow keys,

and knob to set it to a proper value.

Troubleshooting

DS70000 User Guide

301

c Select the desired waveform, tap the Amplitude menu label, and then input the

desired value by using the numeric keypad. Then select the unit "dBm" from the

pop-up menu.

5 The touch functions cannot be used normally.

a Check whether you have locked the touch screen. If yes, refer to instructions in

#unique_28/unique_28_Connect_42_SECTION_HDF_TKJ_X4B

to unlock it.

b Check whether the screen or your finger is stained with oil or sweat. If yes,

please clean the screen or dry your hands.

c Check whether there is a strong magnetic field around the instrument. If the

instrument is close to the strong magnetic field (e.g. a magnet), please move

the instrument away from the magnet field.

d If the problem still persists, please contact RIGOL.

Troubleshooting

DS70000 User Guide

302

26 Appendix

26.1 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Order Information Order No.

Model

3 GHz, 20 GSa/s, 500 Mpts, 4CH High-End DS DS70304

5 GHz, 20 GSa/s, 500 Mpts, 4CH High-End DS DS70504

Standard Accessories

Power Cord Conforming to the Standard of the

Destination Country

— —

USB Cable — —

4 Passive HighZ Probes (500 MHz) RP3500A

Recommended Accessories

Active Differential Probe (3.5 GHz BW) PVA8350

Active Differential Probe (7 GHz BW) PVA8700

Current Probe (50 MHz, 30A) PCA1030

Current Probe (100 MHz, 30A) PCA2030

Current Probe (10 MHz, 150A) PCA1150

High-Voltage Differential Probe (70 MHz, 1400 V) PHA0150

High-Voltage Differential Probe (100 MHz, 1400 V) PHA1150

USB-GPIB Interface Converter USB-GPIB

Upgrade Option

2 Gpts Memory Depth Upgrade Option DS70000-RL-20

Serial Protocol Analysis Option

Embedded Serial Bus Trigger and Analysis (RS232/UART,

I2C, and SPI)

DS70000-EMBDA

Auto Serial Bus Trigger and Analysis (CAN, CAN-FD, LIN,

FlexRay)

DS70000-AUTOA

Audio Serial Bus Trigger and Analysis (I2S) DS70000-AUDIOA

Aerospace Serial Bus Trigger and Analysis (MIL-

STD-1553)

DS70000-AEROA

Measurement Application Option

Advanced Eye Diagram and Jitter Analysis (Option) DS70000-JITTA

Pre-compliance Test Software

USB2.0 Pre-compliance Test DS70000-USBC

100Base-T Ethernet Pre-compliance Test DS70000-ENETC

Real-Time Spectrum Analysis (RTSA)

RTSA DS70000-RTSA

For all the mainframes, accessories and options, please contact the local office of

RIGOL.

Appendix

DS70000 User Guide

303

26.2 Appendix B Warranty

RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. (hereinafter referred to as RIGOL) warrants that the

product mainframe and product accessories will be free from defects in materials and

workmanship within the warranty period.

If a product proves defective within the warranty period, RIGOL guarantees free

replacement or repair for the defective product. To get repair service, please contact

with your nearest RIGOL sales or service office.

There is no other warranty, expressed or implied, except such as is expressly set forth

herein or other applicable warranty card. There is no implied warranty of

merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Under no circumstances shall

RIGOL be liable for any consequential, indirect, ensuing, or special damages for any

breach of warranty in any case.

Appendix

DS70000 User Guide

304

Rigol DS70304 Oscilloscope

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Rigol DS70304 Questions and Answers